Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 228

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management

System
V100R002C01

Operation Guide for WDM End-toEnd Management


Issue

02

Date

2010-09-24

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

About This Document

About This Document


Related Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document.
Product Name

Version

iManager U2000

V100R002C01

Intended Audience
This document describes how to configure an WDM network by using the end-to-end function.
This document guides you to manage an WDM network by using the trail management function.
This document is intended for:
l

Network Monitoring Engineer

Data Configuration Engineer

NM Administrator

System Maintenance Engineer

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol

Description

DANGER

WARNING

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

About This Document

Symbol

Description

CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not


avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.

TIP

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save


time.

NOTE

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement


important points of the main text.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

iv

Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

About This Document

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Based on Product Version V100R002C01


The second release of the iManager U2000 V100R002C01.
Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-08-16) Based on Product Version V100R002C01


The first release of the iManager U2000 V100R002C01.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Contents

Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets.....................................................................................1-1
1.1 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1 Protection Subnet...................................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.2 Isolated Node..........................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Searching for Protection Subnets....................................................................................................................1-2
1.3 Configuring 1:N Wavelength Protection.........................................................................................................1-3
1.3.1 Creating 1:N Optical Channel Protection...............................................................................................1-4
1.3.2 Searching for 1:N Wavelength Protection Subnet.................................................................................1-5
1.3.3 Setting 1:N Wavelength Protection Subnet Parameters.........................................................................1-6
1.3.4 Verifying the 1:N Wavelength Protection Switching............................................................................1-7
1.4 Configuring Protection for an ODUk SPRing.................................................................................................1-8
1.4.1 Creating an ODUk SPRing Protection Group........................................................................................1-8
1.4.2 Searching for an ODUk SPRing Protection Subnet.............................................................................1-10
1.4.3 Setting Parameters of an ODUk SPRing Protection Subnet................................................................1-10
1.4.4 Verifying the ODUk SPRing Protection Switching.............................................................................1-11
1.5 Maintaining Protection Subnets....................................................................................................................1-12
1.5.1 Finding Protection Subnets..................................................................................................................1-13
1.5.2 Querying Protection Subnet Resources................................................................................................1-13
1.5.3 Performing the Protection Switching for a 1:N Wavelength Protection Subnet..................................1-14
1.5.4 Performing ODUk Ring Protection Switching.....................................................................................1-15
1.6 Deleting Isolated Nodes................................................................................................................................1-16
1.7 Deleting Protection Subnets..........................................................................................................................1-17

2 End-to-End WDM Management..............................................................................................2-1


2.1 Managing WDM Trails...................................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Configuration Task Flow.......................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.2 Basic Concepts.......................................................................................................................................2-5
2.1.2.1 WDM Trail..........................................................................................................................................2-5
2.1.2.2 Conflict Trail.....................................................................................................................................2-10
2.1.2.3 Trail Creation Method.......................................................................................................................2-11
2.1.2.4 Process for Creating a Trail...............................................................................................................2-13
2.1.2.5 Platinum Service Group....................................................................................................................2-15
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

Contents

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management
2.1.3 Creating WDM Trails by Trail Search.................................................................................................2-17
2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM Trails................................................................................................................2-18
2.1.3.2 Viewing Discrete Services................................................................................................................2-19
2.1.3.3 Activating and Deactivating Discrete Services.................................................................................2-20
2.1.3.4 Acknowledging or Unacknowledging Discrete Services..................................................................2-21
2.1.3.5 Deleting Discrete Services................................................................................................................2-22
2.1.4 Configuring WDM Trails.....................................................................................................................2-22
2.1.4.1 Creating an OCh Trail.......................................................................................................................2-23
2.1.4.2 Creating an ODUk Trail....................................................................................................................2-27
2.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails........................................................................................................................2-31
2.1.4.4 Creating a Mono Nodal Trail............................................................................................................2-34
2.1.4.5 Creating a Multi-Layer OTN Trail....................................................................................................2-36
2.1.5 Creating a Platinum Service.................................................................................................................2-37
2.1.6 Binding a Platinum Service Group.......................................................................................................2-38
2.1.7 Service Authorization Management.....................................................................................................2-39
2.1.7.1 Specifying a Customer for a Service.................................................................................................2-40
2.1.7.2 Authorizing a Customer to a U2000 User.........................................................................................2-41
2.1.7.3 Authorizing a Trail to a U2000 User.................................................................................................2-42
2.1.7.4 Modifying Trail Authorization Information......................................................................................2-42
2.1.8 Viewing WDM Trails...........................................................................................................................2-43
2.1.8.1 Viewing Route Information of WDM Trail......................................................................................2-44
2.1.8.2 Viewing the Signal Flow Diagram for a WDM Trail.......................................................................2-44
2.1.8.3 Viewing the WDM Single Station Signal Flow Diagram.................................................................2-46
2.1.8.4 Viewing the WDM NE Panel............................................................................................................2-47
2.1.8.5 Viewing Relevant Client Trails.........................................................................................................2-48
2.1.8.6 Browsing Related Server Trails........................................................................................................2-49
2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Power for the Trails.........................................................................................2-50
2.1.8.8 Browsing Associated Working and Protection Trails.......................................................................2-51
2.1.8.9 Viewing the Fiber Information of a Trail..........................................................................................2-52
2.1.9 Maintaining WDM Trails.....................................................................................................................2-52
2.1.9.1 Activating/Deactivating WDM Trails...............................................................................................2-53
2.1.9.2 Querying Cross-Connection Information..........................................................................................2-54
2.1.9.3 Locking or Unlocking a WDM Trail.................................................................................................2-55
2.1.9.4 Querying the 1+1 Protection for a WDM Trail.................................................................................2-55
2.1.9.5 Performing 1+1 Protection Switching for a WDM Trail..................................................................2-56
2.1.9.6 Querying the WXCP/SNCP Protection of a WDM Trail..................................................................2-57
2.1.9.7 Performing the WXCP/SNCP Protection Switching for a WDM Trail............................................2-58
2.1.9.8 Querying the DPPS Protection of a WDM Trail...............................................................................2-59
2.1.9.9 Configuring OTU Overhead on the OCh Trail.................................................................................2-59
2.1.9.10 Modifying the Optical Power Adjustment Mode of a WDM Trail.................................................2-61
2.1.10 Modifying WDM Trails.....................................................................................................................2-62
2.1.10.1 Changing the Source, Sink, and Route of a WDM Trail.................................................................2-62

viii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Contents

2.1.10.2 Modifying Trail Names in Batches.................................................................................................2-64


2.1.10.3 Changing the Route of a Platinum Service.....................................................................................2-64
2.1.10.4 Removing a Trail from a Platinum Service Group.........................................................................2-65
2.1.11 Deleting a WDM Trail.......................................................................................................................2-66
2.1.12 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the OptiX BWS 1600G by Using a traditional
method...........................................................................................................................................................2-67
2.1.13 Sample Application: Configuring an OCh Trail................................................................................2-71
2.1.14 Application Example: Configuring an OCh Trail with OLP Protection by Using the End-To-End Trail
Management Function (OptiX OSN 6800)...................................................................................................2-76
2.1.14.1 Configuration Networking Diagram...............................................................................................2-76
2.1.14.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning.................................................................................2-78
2.1.14.3 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................2-79
2.1.15 Application Example: Configuring an ODUk Trail by Using the Cross-Layer Creation Function (OptiX
OSN 6800).....................................................................................................................................................2-80
2.1.15.1 Configuration Networking Diagram...............................................................................................2-80
2.1.15.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning.................................................................................2-82
2.1.15.3 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................2-86
2.1.16 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the OptiX BWS 1600G by Using a traditional
method...........................................................................................................................................................2-87
2.1.17 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the OptiX OSN 6800 by Using a traditional method
.......................................................................................................................................................................2-91
2.1.17.1 Networking Configuration..............................................................................................................2-91
2.1.17.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning.................................................................................2-93
2.1.17.3 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................2-96
2.1.18 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the OptiX OSN 6800 with the Cross-Layer Trail
Creation Method............................................................................................................................................2-99
2.1.18.1 Networking Configuration............................................................................................................2-100
2.1.18.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning...............................................................................2-101
2.1.18.3 Configuration Process...................................................................................................................2-104
2.1.19 Application Example: Configuring an ODU1 Trail by Using the Cross-Layer Creation Function
(52TOM, ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))..................................................2-106
2.1.19.1 Configuration Networking Diagram.............................................................................................2-107
2.1.19.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning...............................................................................2-108
2.1.19.3 Configuration Process...................................................................................................................2-110
2.1.20 Application Example: Configuring an Any Service by Using the Cross-Layer Creation Function
(52TOM, ODU0 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]))......................................................................2-113
2.1.20.1 Configuration Networking Diagram.............................................................................................2-113
2.1.20.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning...............................................................................2-115
2.1.20.3 Configuration Process...................................................................................................................2-117
2.2 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection........................................................................................2-119
2.2.1 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection Automatically.......................................................2-120
2.2.1.1 Configuration Principle...................................................................................................................2-120
2.2.1.2 Enabling the WSS Function on an NE............................................................................................2-121
2.2.1.3 Creating a Working Cross-Connection for an NE..........................................................................2-122
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

Contents

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management
2.2.1.4 Searching for WDM Trails..............................................................................................................2-123
2.2.1.5 Creating Optical Layer Multipath Protection Automatically..........................................................2-125
2.2.1.6 Modifying the Parameters of Optical Layer Multipath Protection..................................................2-126
2.2.2 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection Manually...............................................................2-128
2.2.2.1 Configuration Principle...................................................................................................................2-129
2.2.2.2 Enabling the WSS Function on an NE............................................................................................2-129
2.2.2.3 Creating a Working Cross-Connection for an NE..........................................................................2-130
2.2.2.4 Creating the Protection Cross-Connection on NEs.........................................................................2-131
2.2.2.5 Searching for WDM Trails..............................................................................................................2-133
2.2.2.6 Creating Optical Layer Multipath Protection Manually..................................................................2-134
2.2.2.7 Modifying the Parameters of Optical Layer Multipath Protection..................................................2-136

2.3 Configuring EAPE......................................................................................................................................2-137


2.3.1 EAPE..................................................................................................................................................2-138
2.3.2 Creating an OCh Trail........................................................................................................................2-141
2.3.3 Creating EAPE Objects......................................................................................................................2-145
2.3.4 Querying EAPE Objects.....................................................................................................................2-146
2.3.5 Starting EAPE Adjustment.................................................................................................................2-147
2.3.6 Deleting EAPE Objects......................................................................................................................2-148
2.4 Managing Alarms on WDM Trails.............................................................................................................2-148
2.4.1 Viewing Current Alarms of a WDM Trail.........................................................................................2-149
2.4.2 Viewing History Alarms of a WDM Trail.........................................................................................2-150
2.4.3 Managing Networkwide WDM Alarm Trails in Real Time..............................................................2-151
2.4.4 Analyzing WDM alarm correlation....................................................................................................2-151
2.5 Managing the Performance of WDM Trails................................................................................................2-152
2.5.1 Viewing Current Performance Data of WDM Trails.........................................................................2-153
2.5.2 Viewing History Performance Data of WDM Trails.........................................................................2-153
2.5.3 Viewing UAT of WDM Trails...........................................................................................................2-154
2.5.4 Viewing Performance Threshold-Crossing Records of WDM Trails................................................2-155
2.5.5 Viewing Ethernet Performance of WDM Trails................................................................................2-156
2.5.6 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an WDM Trail........................................................2-156
2.5.7 Setting WDM Trail Performance Threshold......................................................................................2-157
2.6 Configuring Board Parameters....................................................................................................................2-157
2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board....................................................................................2-158
2.6.1.1 About the Working Modes..............................................................................................................2-158
2.6.1.2 Configuration Rules of the 52TOM board......................................................................................2-160
2.6.1.3 Configuring the Working Mode of the 52TOM Board...................................................................2-161
2.6.1.4 Configuring the Working Mode of the LQM2 board......................................................................2-161
2.6.1.5 Configuring the Working Modes of Ordinary OTUs......................................................................2-164
2.6.2 Configuring the Service Mode...........................................................................................................2-164
2.6.3 Service Type.......................................................................................................................................2-165
2.6.4 Configuring the Service Type............................................................................................................2-171
2.6.5 Modifying Port...................................................................................................................................2-172
x

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Contents

2.6.6 Creating Cross-Connections...............................................................................................................2-173


2.6.7 Service Mode (WDM Interface).........................................................................................................2-175
2.6.8 Service Type (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................................2-177
2.6.9 GUI Parameter Description: WDM Cross-Connection Configuration..............................................2-179

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Figures

Figures
Figure 2-1 End-to-end WDM network management flow...................................................................................2-4
Figure 2-2 Trail....................................................................................................................................................2-6
Figure 2-3 OSC Trail............................................................................................................................................2-6
Figure 2-4 ODUk (k = 1, 2, ...) trail.....................................................................................................................2-7
Figure 2-5 ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, ...) trail.................................................................................................................2-8
Figure 2-6 40G inverse multiplexing trail ...........................................................................................................2-9
Figure 2-7 10G inverse multiplexing trail .........................................................................................................2-10
Figure 2-8 A conflict trail generated because a fiber is added...........................................................................2-10
Figure 2-9 A conflict trail generated because a single station cross-connection is lost.....................................2-11
Figure 2-10 A conflict trail generated because a protection service is deleted on a per-NE basis....................2-11
Figure 2-11 Creating trails by trail search..........................................................................................................2-14
Figure 2-12 Creating trails in the automatic mode.............................................................................................2-15
Figure 2-13 Platinum service group...................................................................................................................2-16
Figure 2-14 Downgraded platinum service group..............................................................................................2-17
Figure 2-15 Service authorization management.................................................................................................2-40
Figure 2-16 Network Design..............................................................................................................................2-68
Figure 2-17 Station A.........................................................................................................................................2-68
Figure 2-18 Station B.........................................................................................................................................2-69
Figure 2-19 Station C.........................................................................................................................................2-69
Figure 2-20 Station D.........................................................................................................................................2-69
Figure 2-21 Network design...............................................................................................................................2-72
Figure 2-22 NE panel on station A.....................................................................................................................2-73
Figure 2-23 Signal flow of the trail from station B to station C........................................................................2-73
Figure 2-24 Signal flow of the trail from station B to station D........................................................................2-74
Figure 2-25 Signal flow of the trail from station D to station B........................................................................2-74
Figure 2-26 Configuration networking diagram of an OCh trail.......................................................................2-77
Figure 2-27 Card configuration..........................................................................................................................2-77
Figure 2-28 Signal flow of an OCh trail.............................................................................................................2-78
Figure 2-29 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE2......................................................................................2-78
Figure 2-30 Configuration networking diagram of an ODUk trail....................................................................2-81
Figure 2-31 Card configuration..........................................................................................................................2-82
Figure 2-32 Signal flow of an ODUk trail.........................................................................................................2-83
Figure 2-33 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE4......................................................................................2-84
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Figures

Figure 2-34 Intra-station signal flow of NE2 and NE3......................................................................................2-84


Figure 2-35 Network Design..............................................................................................................................2-88
Figure 2-36 Station A.........................................................................................................................................2-88
Figure 2-37 Station B.........................................................................................................................................2-89
Figure 2-38 Station C.........................................................................................................................................2-89
Figure 2-39 Station D.........................................................................................................................................2-89
Figure 2-40 Networking configuration for a GE service....................................................................................2-92
Figure 2-41 Card configuration..........................................................................................................................2-92
Figure 2-42 GE service signal flow ...................................................................................................................2-93
Figure 2-43 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE4......................................................................................2-94
Figure 2-44 Networking configuration for a GE service..................................................................................2-100
Figure 2-45 Card configuration........................................................................................................................2-101
Figure 2-46 GE service signal flow .................................................................................................................2-102
Figure 2-47 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE4....................................................................................2-102
Figure 2-48 Configuration networking diagram of an ODU1 trail..................................................................2-107
Figure 2-49 Card configuration........................................................................................................................2-108
Figure 2-50 ODU1 service signal flow............................................................................................................2-108
Figure 2-51 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE2....................................................................................2-109
Figure 2-52 Configuration networking diagram of an Any service.................................................................2-114
Figure 2-53 Card configuration........................................................................................................................2-115
Figure 2-54 Any service signal flow................................................................................................................2-116
Figure 2-55 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE2....................................................................................2-116
Figure 2-56 Scenario of the single VOA unit that takes the common OTU as the source...............................2-139
Figure 2-57 Scenario of the dual VOA units that take the dual-fed and selective-receiving OTUs as the sources
...........................................................................................................................................................................2-140
Figure 2-58 Scenario of the dual VOA units with the OLP protection units...................................................2-140

xiv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Tables

Tables
Table 2-1 ODUk rate level...................................................................................................................................2-6
Table 2-2 Comparison of methods for creating trails.........................................................................................2-12
Table 2-3 Network data table.............................................................................................................................2-72
Table 2-4 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..................................................................................................2-79
Table 2-5 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..................................................................................................2-80
Table 2-6 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..................................................................................................2-85
Table 2-7 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail...............................................................................................2-86
Table 2-8 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..................................................................................................2-86
Table 2-9 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail...............................................................................................2-87
Table 2-10 Parameter planning for an OCh trail................................................................................................2-95
Table 2-11 Parameter planning for an ODU2 trail.............................................................................................2-95
Table 2-12 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail.............................................................................................2-95
Table 2-13 Parameter planning for a GE service................................................................................................2-96
Table 2-14 Parameter planning for an OCh trail................................................................................................2-98
Table 2-15 Parameter planning for an ODU2 trail.............................................................................................2-98
Table 2-16 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail.............................................................................................2-99
Table 2-17 Parameter planning for a GE service................................................................................................2-99
Table 2-18 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..............................................................................................2-103
Table 2-19 Parameter planning for a GE service..............................................................................................2-104
Table 2-20 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..............................................................................................2-105
Table 2-21 Parameter planning for a GE service..............................................................................................2-106
Table 2-22 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..............................................................................................2-110
Table 2-23 Parameter planning for OTU1 cross-connections..........................................................................2-110
Table 2-24 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail...........................................................................................2-110
Table 2-25 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..............................................................................................2-112
Table 2-26 Parameter planning for OTU1 cross-connections..........................................................................2-112
Table 2-27 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail...........................................................................................2-112
Table 2-28 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..............................................................................................2-117
Table 2-29 Parameter planning for the Any service.........................................................................................2-117
Table 2-30 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..............................................................................................2-119
Table 2-31 Parameter planning for the Any service.........................................................................................2-119
Table 2-32 Mapping between the working modes and signal flows of the 52TOM board..............................2-159
Table 2-33 Service access function..................................................................................................................2-165
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xv

Tables

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management
Table 2-34 Service access function..................................................................................................................2-166
Table 2-35 Types of Service Access................................................................................................................2-167
Table 2-36 Service types supported by the system...........................................................................................2-169
Table 2-37 Parameters of the Client-Side Port.................................................................................................2-173
Table 2-38 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration........................................................................................2-181
Table 2-39 Create Cross-connect Service........................................................................................................2-183
Table 2-40 Create SNCP Service.....................................................................................................................2-185
Table 2-41 Create WXCP Service....................................................................................................................2-190

xvi

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

Managing WDM Protection Subnets

About This Chapter


A protection subnet has a structure of providing complete self-protection functions. The purpose
of managing protection subnets is to configure and display network protection, for example,
browsing, deleting, modifying and searching for protection subnets, managing isolated nodes.
1.1 Basic Concepts
According to the layered structure of transport network, protection subnet, belonging to the
network layer, refers to a network structure that has a comprehensive self-protection function.
The protection subnet is a network unit of composing the optical transport network. To have a
good understanding of the protection subnet, you need to learn some basic concepts of the
network layer.
1.2 Searching for Protection Subnets
By searching for a protection subnet, the configured protection attributes at the NE layer on the
U2000 are synchronized to the network layer on the U2000 to create protection subnets
automatically.
1.3 Configuring 1:N Wavelength Protection
On the U2000, you can create 1:N wavelength protection groups, search for 1:N wavelength
protection subnets, and perform an external switch from 1:N wavelength protection subnets.
1.4 Configuring Protection for an ODUk SPRing
By using the U2000, you can query the protection subnet resources for an ODUk SPRing, create
an ODUk protection group, search for the ODUk SPRing, perform data consistency check on
the ODUk SPRing, set the protection subnet parameters for the ODUk SPRing, and delete an
ODUk SPRing.
1.5 Maintaining Protection Subnets
On the U2000, you can maintain protection subnets.
1.6 Deleting Isolated Nodes
To release protection resources that are used by isolated nodes, you need to delete isolated nodes.
1.7 Deleting Protection Subnets
When an existing protection subnet is not suitable, you can delete the protection subnet.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1.1 Basic Concepts


According to the layered structure of transport network, protection subnet, belonging to the
network layer, refers to a network structure that has a comprehensive self-protection function.
The protection subnet is a network unit of composing the optical transport network. To have a
good understanding of the protection subnet, you need to learn some basic concepts of the
network layer.
1.1.1 Protection Subnet
A protection subnet refers to a network architecture that has a comprehensive self-protection
function. It is a network that composes the optical transmission network.
1.1.2 Isolated Node
An isolated node is not equal to an isolated NE. An isolated node refers to a special logical
system that is independent from any protection subnet. An isolated node does not belong to any
protection subnet.

1.1.1 Protection Subnet


A protection subnet refers to a network architecture that has a comprehensive self-protection
function. It is a network that composes the optical transmission network.
In the U2000, a protection subnet is a network level concept. NEs and fiber connections are the
basic elements required to construct a protection subnet. You should create NEs, perform basic
configurations for them, and then properly create fiber connections between the NEs. You should
have access to sufficient resources to create a protection subnet.

1.1.2 Isolated Node


An isolated node is not equal to an isolated NE. An isolated node refers to a special logical
system that is independent from any protection subnet. An isolated node does not belong to any
protection subnet.
An isolated node is a node that is configured at NEs but cannot or does not compose a protection
subnet with other nodes. Currently, the WDM equipment supports the 1:N optical path protection
subnet and the ODUk SPRing protection subnet. The network node that is configured with the
1:N optical path protection group or the ODUk SPRing protection group but does not belong to
any protection subnet is an isolated node.
An isolated node should not exist in a transmission network that runs normally. The reason for
the existence of any isolated nodes can be as follows:
l

The configuration is incorrect at the NE side.

The fiber that should be connected to the node is not created on the U2000.

1.2 Searching for Protection Subnets


By searching for a protection subnet, the configured protection attributes at the NE layer on the
U2000 are synchronized to the network layer on the U2000 to create protection subnets
automatically.
1-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

The NE data must be configured, and fibers must be properly created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Search for WDM Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Consistency Verification of Existing Subnet screen, select the protection subnet and
click Next.
NOTE

If the verification is unsuccessful and the subnet becomes abnormal, the search menu is unavailable. In
this case, you need to delete the abnormal subnet from the network layer and then re-search for the subnet.

Step 3 Click Search to start the search. The Subnet Name, Consistent Status and Subnet Type
parameters of the searched protection subnet are automatically displayed.
Step 4 Click Next to check consistency of the protection subnet.
NOTE

If there are isolated nodes searched out, you can delete the nodes that do not form any protection subnet.
Refer to 1.6 Deleting Isolated Nodes.

Step 5 Click Finish. The searched protection subnet is displayed in the Main Topology.
----End

1.3 Configuring 1:N Wavelength Protection


On the U2000, you can create 1:N wavelength protection groups, search for 1:N wavelength
protection subnets, and perform an external switch from 1:N wavelength protection subnets.
1.3.1 Creating 1:N Optical Channel Protection
1:N (N8) optical channel protection is created based on 1:N (N8) optical channel protection
group. To create 1:N (N8) optical channel protection, you need to create a 1:N (N8) optical
channel protection group for each node.
1.3.2 Searching for 1:N Wavelength Protection Subnet
After creating 1:N wavelength protection groups and searching for WDM trails, you need to
search for the 1:N wavelength protection subnet. In this way, you can manage the 1:N wavelength
protection as a protection subnet.
1.3.3 Setting 1:N Wavelength Protection Subnet Parameters
You can set parameters for a 1:N wavelength protection subnet.
1.3.4 Verifying the 1:N Wavelength Protection Switching
After you search out the 1:N wavelength protection subnet and set the related parameters, you
can verify whether the subnet works properly by performing the switching and querying the
switching status.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-3

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1.3.1 Creating 1:N Optical Channel Protection


1:N (N8) optical channel protection is created based on 1:N (N8) optical channel protection
group. To create 1:N (N8) optical channel protection, you need to create a 1:N (N8) optical
channel protection group for each node.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Fibers must be correctly created, and all internal and external fibers must be correctly
connected.

An OCP card and two or more OTU cards of same kind must be created.

Applies to the OptiX BWS 1600G, OptiX BWS 320GV3, OptiX BWS 1600G OLA and
OptiX BWS 1600S.

Applies to the OptiX BWS 1600A and OptiX BWS 1600G (NA).

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > 1:N Optical Channel
Protection from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query to query the information about the protection from the NE.
Step 3 Click New. The Create dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Double-click the Number of Working Channels field, and choose the proper number from the
drop-down list. For other parameters, refer to 1:N Optical Channel Protection.
Step 5 By referring to Step 4, set the corresponding OTU Optical Interface Number for Protection
Channel and Working Channel, and set Protection Priorities for Working Channel.

1-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

NOTE

l OTUs that serve as the working and protection channels must be configured on the same NE.
l Every card in this protection group and the OCP card must be set in the same shelf.
l If you need to check the consistency of the parameters, you need to set Parameter Consistency Check
Flag to a proper value.

Step 6 Click OK. The created 1:N (N8) optical channel protection group is displayed.
Step 7 Repeat Step 1 through Step 6 to configure a 1:N (N8) wavelength protection group of the
opposite NE.
----End

1.3.2 Searching for 1:N Wavelength Protection Subnet


After creating 1:N wavelength protection groups and searching for WDM trails, you need to
search for the 1:N wavelength protection subnet. In this way, you can manage the 1:N wavelength
protection as a protection subnet.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Applies to the OptiX BWS 1600G, OptiX BWS 1600G OLA, OptiX BWS 1600S and the
OptiX BWS 320GV3.

Applies to the LWF, LWFS, LWS, LWC, LWC1, LBE, LBES, LBF, LBFS boards.

Fibers must be created properly.

The 1:N wavelength protection group must be created.

The WDM trail must be created and the bidirectional client trail must be searched out.

Background Information
For two NEs that are preconfigured as a 1:N WDM protection subnet, the protection group IDs
of the WDM protection groups on the NEs must be consistent.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Search for WDM Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu.
Step 2 Click Next to perform the consistency check of the subnet.
Step 3 Click Search to search for the protection subnet.
The existing 1:N wavelength protection subnet is displayed in the Protection View.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-5

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Step 4 Optional: Click Next to query the information of the isolated nodes that are searched out.
Step 5 Click Finish.
----End

1.3.3 Setting 1:N Wavelength Protection Subnet Parameters


You can set parameters for a 1:N wavelength protection subnet.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The 1:N wavelength protection subnet must be searched out.

Applies to the OptiX BWS 1600G, OptiX BWS 1600S and the OptiX BWS 320GV3.

Context

CAUTION
Changing the protection mode may interrupt services. Exercise caution when you perform this
operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Manage WDM Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu.
Step 2 Select a protection link, right-click, and choose Protection Subnet Attributes from the shortcut
menu. The Protection Subnet Attributes user interface is displayed. Click the Protection
Subnet Parameters tab.
Step 3 Set parameters for the protection subnet.
1-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

Step 4 Click Apply.


----End

1.3.4 Verifying the 1:N Wavelength Protection Switching


After you search out the 1:N wavelength protection subnet and set the related parameters, you
can verify whether the subnet works properly by performing the switching and querying the
switching status.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The 1:N wavelength protection group must be searched out.

Context

CAUTION
Performing protection switching may interrupt services.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Maintain WDM Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu.
Step 2 The Protection Subnet Attributes window is displayed. Select the protection subnet and click
the Protection Subnet Maintenance tab.
Step 3 Click Query to query whether the nodes are switched and whether the protocols are enabled in
the 1:N wavelength protection subnet.
NOTE

If the protocol on a node is disabled, enable the protocol first.

Step 4 Perform the manual or forced switching on all nodes in the protection subnet one by one in the
corresponding direction.
l

To perform a manual switching, click East or West and select Manual Switching from
the drop-down menu. Then, select the channel that services are switched to according to
the OCP optical swtich number.

To perform a forced switching, click East or West and select Forced Switching from the
drop-down menu. Then, select the channel that services are switched to according to the
OCP optical switch number.
NOTE

When performing the switching, maintenance or lockout on a node, you cannot select East and West at the
same time.

Step 5 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click OK.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-7

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Step 6 Click Query to query whether the services on all nodes are already switched to the protection
paths in the 1:N wavelength protection subnet.
Step 7 Select all nodes in the protection subnet one by one. Click East or West, and then select
Clear from the drop-down menu to clear the switching on each node.
Step 8 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click OK.
----End

1.4 Configuring Protection for an ODUk SPRing


By using the U2000, you can query the protection subnet resources for an ODUk SPRing, create
an ODUk protection group, search for the ODUk SPRing, perform data consistency check on
the ODUk SPRing, set the protection subnet parameters for the ODUk SPRing, and delete an
ODUk SPRing.
1.4.1 Creating an ODUk SPRing Protection Group
The ODUk SPRing protection is used in a ring network that is configured with distributed
services. It occupies two ODUk channels, realizing the protection for multiple services among
all stations.
1.4.2 Searching for an ODUk SPRing Protection Subnet
The U2000 can search for and form ODUk SPRing protection subnets according to the created
fiber cables and ODUk SPRing protection groups. After you create an ODUk SPRing protection
group or search for WDM trails, you need to search for ODUk SPRing protection subnets. In
this way, ODUk SPRing networks can be managed as protection subnets.
1.4.3 Setting Parameters of an ODUk SPRing Protection Subnet
This section describes how to set parameters of an ODUk SPRing protection subnet.
1.4.4 Verifying the ODUk SPRing Protection Switching
This topic describes how to perform the external switching for an ODUk SPRing protection on
the U2000. During the deployment commissioning, the external switching is performed to test
whether the ODUk SPRing protection functions normally and provides protection.

1.4.1 Creating an ODUk SPRing Protection Group


The ODUk SPRing protection is used in a ring network that is configured with distributed
services. It occupies two ODUk channels, realizing the protection for multiple services among
all stations.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
Currently, The ODU1/ODU2-level protection can be achieved.
When configuring the ODUk SPRing protection of ODU1 or ODU2 levels, the Service Mode
of the port on the line board should be set to ODU1 or ODU2.

1-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

Background Information
l

When the protection channel forms a ring, you can search out an ODUk protection subnet
at the network layer.

The ODUk SPRing protection of the ODU1 and ODU2 levels is supported currently.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > ODUk SPRing from the Function
Tree.
Step 2 Click New. The New ODUk Ring Network Protection dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set Protection Group ID and Level as required. In the Select Mapping Direction area, set the
West Working Unit, West Protection Unit, East Working Unit, and East Protection Unit.
To set a unit, select one channel from the Available Channel and click

NOTE

l The services in the east and west directions must be configured on different NS2/ND2 boards.
l The working and protection channels in the east and west directions of an ODUk protection group can be
on different NS2/ND2 boards.
l You can create a protection group when the Selected Channel contains at least East Protection Unit and
West Protection Unit.

Step 4 Click OK. After successful operation, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
Step 5 Select one protection group. In Channel Mapping Relation, select West Working Unit and
East Working Unit. Right-click them, and select Bound Span ID.
NOTE

l Before binding the span IDs, ensure that a bidirectional cross-connection is created successfully
between the working unit in the protection group in the corresponding direction and the add/drop board.
l The span IDs need be bound only on the stations that add or drop services. In the case of those stations
that do not add or drop services, you need not perform such an operation.

Step 6 In the Bound Span ID window, set Span ID, and then click OK. Span ID will be updated.
Step 7 Select one protection group. Right-click the Management Node, and select YES. Then click
Apply. Management Node will be updated.
Step 8 Select one protection group, and you can set parameters such as WTR Time(s) and Enable
SD. In Channel Mapping Relation, double-click the Hold-Off Time(s) and set the hold-off
time.
NOTE

The hold-off time of the protection unit should be longer than that of the working unit.

Step 9 In the case of the NEs in other stations on the ring, start the NE Explorer. Then, refer to Steps
1 through 8 to create the ODUk SPRing protection on the local NE, to complete the creation of
the protection ring.
NOTE

In a ODUk SPRing protection group, there must be only one management node.

Step 10 After the protection ring is created, select one protection group, and click Start Protocol to
make the protection group take effect.
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-9

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Postrequisite
Select one protection group and click Delete. Click OK on the Confirm dialog box displayed.
The protection group is deleted.

1.4.2 Searching for an ODUk SPRing Protection Subnet


The U2000 can search for and form ODUk SPRing protection subnets according to the created
fiber cables and ODUk SPRing protection groups. After you create an ODUk SPRing protection
group or search for WDM trails, you need to search for ODUk SPRing protection subnets. In
this way, ODUk SPRing networks can be managed as protection subnets.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Applies to the OptiX OSN 3800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800 I.

Fiber connections must be created. All internal and external fibers are correctly connected.

The bidirectional server trail must be searched out.

An ODUk protection group must be created.

Context
NOTE

The search of an ODUk SPRing protection subnet supports only the scenario in which an ODU1 or ODU2 trail
exists between the ports of adjacent protection groups.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Search for WDM Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu.
Step 2 Click Next to check consistency of the protection subnet.
Step 3 Click Search to search for the protection subnet.
The ODUk SPRing protection subnet that is searched out is displayed.
Step 4 Optional: Click Next to query the information of the isolated nodes that are searched out.
Step 5 Click Finish.
----End

1.4.3 Setting Parameters of an ODUk SPRing Protection Subnet


This section describes how to set parameters of an ODUk SPRing protection subnet.

Prerequisite

1-10

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Applies to the OptiX OSN 3800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800 I.

The ODUk SPRing protection subnet must be searched out.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

Context

CAUTION
Changing the protection mode may interrupt services. Exercise caution when you perform this
operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Manage WDM Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu.
Step 2 Right-click a protection link and choose Protection Subnet Attributes from the shortcut menu.
The Protection Subnet Attributes user interface is displayed. Click the Protection Subnet
Parameters tab.
Step 3 Click Query to query the parameters of the protection subnet from the NE side.
Step 4 Set the WTR Time(s), SD Condition, and Management Node as required.
Step 5 Optional: Click Calculate Span ID. The calculated span ID is displayed in the Span ID field.
Step 6 Click Apply. After the operation succeeds, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
Step 7 Click Close to return to the Protection View.
----End

1.4.4 Verifying the ODUk SPRing Protection Switching


This topic describes how to perform the external switching for an ODUk SPRing protection on
the U2000. During the deployment commissioning, the external switching is performed to test
whether the ODUk SPRing protection functions normally and provides protection.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The ODUk SPRing protection subnet must be searched out.

Context

CAUTION
The protection switching may affect the services or the functions that are already configured.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Maintain WDM Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-11

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Step 2 The Protection Subnet Attributes window is displayed. Select the protection subnet and click
the Protection Subnet Maintenance tab.
Step 3 Click Query to query the statuses of protocol controller, east, and west of the protection subnet
from the NE.
NOTE

If the protocol on a node is disabled, enable the protocol first.

Step 4 Perform the manual, forced or exercise switching on all nodes in the protection subnet one by
one in the corresponding direction.
l

To perform a manual switching, click East or West and select Manual Switch to
Protection-Ring from the drop-down menu.

To perform a forced switching, click East or West and select Forced Switch to ProtectionRing from the drop-down menu.

To perform a exercise switching, click East or West and select Exercise-Ring from the
drop-down menu.
NOTE

When performing the switching, maintenance or lockout on a node, you cannot select East and West at the
same time.

Step 5 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click OK.
Step 6 Click Query to query whether the services on all nodes are already switched to the protection
paths in the ODUk SPRing protection subnet.
Step 7 Select all nodes in the protection subnet one by one. Click East or West, and then select Clear
All from the drop-down menu to clear the switching on each node.
Step 8 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click OK.
----End

1.5 Maintaining Protection Subnets


On the U2000, you can maintain protection subnets.
1.5.1 Finding Protection Subnets
When there are a number of protection subnets in a network, you use the search function to
quickly find the desired protection subnet.
1.5.2 Querying Protection Subnet Resources
After you search out a protection subnet, you can query the usage of subnet resources, so that
you can plan and manage the subnet in a better way.
1.5.3 Performing the Protection Switching for a 1:N Wavelength Protection Subnet
You can run an external switching command to perform or clear the switching for a 1:N
wavelength protection subnet. External switching commands include: forced switching, manual
switching, and lockout. In the deployment and commissioning, you can perform switching to
test whether the 1:N wavelength protection switching works properly. In the fault maintenance,
you can perform this operation to locate faults.
1.5.4 Performing ODUk Ring Protection Switching
1-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

On the U2000, you can perform or clear external switching for an ODUk ring network. During
the deployment and commissioning, you can perform external switching to test whether ODUk
ring switching works properly. During the fault maintenance, you can perform this operation
for fault location.

1.5.1 Finding Protection Subnets


When there are a number of protection subnets in a network, you use the search function to
quickly find the desired protection subnet.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

The protection subnet must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click in the Main Topology and choose Search WDM Protection Subnet. The Search
Protection Subnet dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

You need to select the Protection check box on the upper right corner of the Main Topology in advance.

Step 2 Set the search condition and enter the keyword.


Step 3 Click Search and the protection subnet that is searched out is highlighted in the Network View.
----End

1.5.2 Querying Protection Subnet Resources


After you search out a protection subnet, you can query the usage of subnet resources, so that
you can plan and manage the subnet in a better way.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The protection subnet must be searched out.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-13

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Manage WDM Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu.
Step 2 Right-click a protection link, and choose Protection Subnet Attributes from the shortcut menu.
The Protection Subnet Attributes window is displayed. Click the Resource Description tab.
Step 3 Click Query to query the usage of the protection subnet resources.
----End

1.5.3 Performing the Protection Switching for a 1:N Wavelength


Protection Subnet
You can run an external switching command to perform or clear the switching for a 1:N
wavelength protection subnet. External switching commands include: forced switching, manual
switching, and lockout. In the deployment and commissioning, you can perform switching to
test whether the 1:N wavelength protection switching works properly. In the fault maintenance,
you can perform this operation to locate faults.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The 1:N wavelength protection group must be searched out.

Applies to the OptiX BWS 1600G, OptiX BWS 1600S and OptiX BWS 320GV3.

Applies to the LWF, LWFS, LWC1, LBE, LBES, LBF and LBFS boards.

Applies to the OptiX BWS 1600A and OptiX BWS 1600G (NA).

Applies to the LWF, LWFS, LWC1, LBE and LBES boards.

Context

CAUTION
Force switching and manual switching may interrupt services.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Maintain WDM Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu.
Step 2 The Protection Subnet Attributes window is displayed. Select the protection subnet and click
the Protection Subnet Maintenance tab.
Step 3 Click Query to query whether the nodes are switched and whether the protocols are enabled in
the 1:N wavelength protection subnet.
Step 4 To enable or disable the protocol, click Start Protocol and select Start or Stop from the dropdown menu.
1-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

NOTE

If you want to enable or disable the protocol for the entire protection subnet, select Start the Protocol
Networkwide or Stop the Protocol Networkwide from the drop-down menu.

Step 5 Perform the manual or forced switching on all nodes in the protection subnet one by one in the
corresponding direction.
l

To perform a manual switching, click East or West and select Manual Switching from
the drop-down menu.

To perform a forced switching, click East or West and select Forced Switching from the
drop-down menu.
NOTE

When performing the switching, maintenance or lockout on a node, you cannot select east and west direction
at the same time.

Step 6 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click OK.
Step 7 Optional: Perform the lockout operation. Select a desired node, click Lock East or Lock
West, and select Lockout of Protection.
Step 8 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click OK.
Step 9 Optional: To clear protection switching, select a node, click East or West, and then select
Clear from the drop-down menu.
Step 10 Optional: Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating
that the operation is successful. Click OK.
----End

1.5.4 Performing ODUk Ring Protection Switching


On the U2000, you can perform or clear external switching for an ODUk ring network. During
the deployment and commissioning, you can perform external switching to test whether ODUk
ring switching works properly. During the fault maintenance, you can perform this operation
for fault location.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The ODUk ring protection subnet must be searched out.

Context

CAUTION
The protection switching may affect the services or the functions that are already configured.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-15

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Maintain WDM Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu.
Step 2 The Protection Subnet Attributes window is displayed. Select the protection subnet and click
the Protection Subnet Maintenance tab.
Step 3 Click Query to query the statuses of protocol controller, east, and west of the protection subnet
from the NE.
Step 4 To enable or disable the protocol, click Start Protocol and select Start or Stop from the dropdown menu.
NOTE

If you want to enable or disable the protocol for the entire protection subnet, select Start the Protocol
Networkwide or Stop the Protocol Networkwide from the drop-down menu.

Step 5 Perform the manual, forced or exercise switching on all nodes in the protection subnet one by
one in the corresponding direction.
l

To perform a manual switching, click East or West and select Manual Switch to
Protection-Ring from the drop-down menu.

To perform a forced switching, click East or West and select Forced Switch to ProtectionRing from the drop-down menu.

To perform a exercise switching, click East or West and select Exercise-Ring from the
drop-down menu.
NOTE

When performing the switching, maintenance or lockout on a node, you cannot select East and West at the
same time.

Step 6 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click OK.
Step 7 Optional: Perform the lockout operation. Select a desired node, click Lock East or Lock
West, and select Lockout of Protection-Ring.
Step 8 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click OK.
Step 9 Optional: To clear protection switching, select a node, click East or West, and then select Clear
All from the drop-down menu.
Step 10 Optional: Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating
that the operation is successful. Click OK.
----End

1.6 Deleting Isolated Nodes


To release protection resources that are used by isolated nodes, you need to delete isolated nodes.

Prerequisite
l
1-16

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

One or more isolated nodes must exist.

Applies to the isolated node which node type is ODUk SPRing.

Context

CAUTION
Deleting isolated nodes may interrupt services. Exercise caution when you perform this
operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Manage WDM Isolated Node from the Main
Menu.
Step 2 Select the isolated node you want to delete, right-click and choose Delete.
Step 3 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
----End

1.7 Deleting Protection Subnets


When an existing protection subnet is not suitable, you can delete the protection subnet.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Context
NOTE

The deletion of a protection subnet will leave the equipment or services unprotected. Hence, exercise
caution before this operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Manage WDM Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu.
Step 2 Right-click the protection subnet to be deleted and choose Delete from the NM or Delete from
the NE or Delete All from the NM from the shortcut menu.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-17

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

NOTE

The methods to delete a protection subnet are as follows:


l Delete from the NM: Deletes the relation between the protection subnet and logical systems at the NE
side, to allow deleting of fibers, re-uploading, and so on. This command is not delivered to the NE and
does not affect the services. The deleted protection subnet can be located by using the search feature.
The U2000 locates it according to the NE layer protection information.
l Delete from the NE: Deletes the protection subnet, logical systems at the NE side, and all traffic in
the protection subnet. The deleted protection subnet cannot be restored without being created again.
l Delete All from the NM: Deletes data other than fibers in the network layer. After the deletion, you
can search out trails and protection subnets again by using the search feature. It is recommended that
you do not select this option, because a large amount of data will be deleted.

Step 3 In the Operation Prompt dialog box, click Yes.


NOTE

If Delete from the NE is selected, you need to confirm the operation once more.

Step 4 After completion, click Close in the dialog box displayed to complete the operation.
----End

1-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

End-to-End WDM Management

About This Chapter


You can configure WDM services using the trail management function.

Prerequisite
The trail management license must be provided for the U2000.
2.1 Managing WDM Trails
This section describes how to manage end-to-end WDM services based on the trail management
function of the U2000.
2.2 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection
The optical layer multipath protection can fully utilize the existing idle line resources of the
network. Through the optical cross-connections of the WSS boards, this protection offers
automatic and flexible selection of the protection paths in the protection switching.
2.3 Configuring EAPE
The U2000 supports configuring the enhanced automatic power equalization (EAPE) for a trail.
By adjusting the optical power of a WDM trail, the EAPE can reduce or even eliminate bit errors
of services on the trail.
2.4 Managing Alarms on WDM Trails
You can use the U2000 function of end-to-end trail management to manage the alarms generated
on WDM trails at the network layer.
2.5 Managing the Performance of WDM Trails
You can use the network layer function of the U2000 to perform end-to-end performance
management on WDM trails.
2.6 Configuring Board Parameters
When configuring WDM services, you need to configure different boards in the network. The
various types of boards and the procedure for configuring the board parameters are described
here.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.1 Managing WDM Trails


This section describes how to manage end-to-end WDM services based on the trail management
function of the U2000.

Prerequisite
A U2000 user can manage all the trails that the user creates. To manage a trail that is created by
another U2000 user, a U2000 user must meet any of the following conditions:
l

The U2000 user belongs to the Administrators user group.

The right to manage the required trail is allocated to the U2000 user.

2.1.1 Configuration Task Flow


A configuration task flow describes the operation tasks that manage an WDM network by using
the end-to-end function of the U2000. In addition, the relationships between the operation tasks
are described.
2.1.2 Basic Concepts
This section describes the basic concepts of the WDM end-to-end management.
2.1.3 Creating WDM Trails by Trail Search
After a new network is set up or services are configured on a per-NE basis, you need to perform
an WDM trail search so that you can manage configured services by using the trail management
function.
2.1.4 Configuring WDM Trails
After searching out the relevant trail information on the U2000, you can create OCh, ODUk or
client trails by specifying the sources and sinks of the trails.
2.1.5 Creating a Platinum Service
In a platinum service group, the WDM trails do not pass through the same NE, fiber or fiber/
cable pipe, so that the risk that multiple trails are interrupted is lowered.
2.1.6 Binding a Platinum Service Group
You can bind a trail or trails when you need to add an existing trail to a platinum service group
or bind existing trails as a platinum service group.
2.1.7 Service Authorization Management
If there are multiple service trails maintained by different operators, they may care about only
the trails in their own responsibility but ignore the other services. Service authorization can filter
the information not in concern of an operator, who then views and manages only the trails in the
responsibility. In this manner, the management and maintenance efficiency is improved.
2.1.8 Viewing WDM Trails
This section describes how to view the connection relation of all boards on a WDM NE.
2.1.9 Maintaining WDM Trails
The end-to-end trails are carriers of services of the customers. In the routine maintenance, the
administrator and maintainer must find out the status of the trails to ensure that all the services
are transmitted correctly.
2.1.10 Modifying WDM Trails
Due to service requirements, sometimes, you need to modify the configuration of a WDM trail.
U2000 supports manually modifying the source and sink of an exisiting WDM trail and the trail
names in batches, instead of creating WDM trails. This greatly simplifies the operations.
2-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.1.11 Deleting a WDM Trail


The operation deletes the WDM trails from the network layer or from the NE layer. You need
to delete the trails if the network will be adjusted or rebuilt.
2.1.12 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the OptiX BWS 1600G by Using
a traditional method
This sample describes how to configure GE Services with the WXCP protection in the end-toend mode.
2.1.13 Sample Application: Configuring an OCh Trail
This section describes how to configure an OCh trail in the end-to-end mode.
2.1.14 Application Example: Configuring an OCh Trail with OLP Protection by Using the EndTo-End Trail Management Function (OptiX OSN 6800)
This topic describes how to configure an OCh trail with the optical line protection (OLP) on the
OptiX OSN 6800.
2.1.15 Application Example: Configuring an ODUk Trail by Using the Cross-Layer Creation
Function (OptiX OSN 6800)
This topic describes how to configure an ODUk trail with the subnetwork connection protection
(SNCP) on the OptiX OSN 6800.
2.1.17 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the OptiX OSN 6800 by Using a
traditional method
This configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure a
GE service with the SNCP protection.
2.1.18 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the OptiX OSN 6800 with the
Cross-Layer Trail Creation Method
This configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure a
GE service with the SNCP protection.
2.1.19 Application Example: Configuring an ODU1 Trail by Using the Cross-Layer Creation
Function (52TOM, ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))
This topic describes how to configure an ODU1 trail on the OptiX OSN 6800.
2.1.20 Application Example: Configuring an Any Service by Using the Cross-Layer Creation
Function (52TOM, ODU0 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]))
This topic describes how to configure an Any service on the OptiX OSN 8800 series.

2.1.1 Configuration Task Flow


A configuration task flow describes the operation tasks that manage an WDM network by using
the end-to-end function of the U2000. In addition, the relationships between the operation tasks
are described.
Referring to the Figure 2-1, configure and manage an WDM network.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Figure 2-1 End-to-end WDM network management flow

NOTE

l When you create a Client or an ODUk trail whose source or sink is an NG WDM NE, you need to set
the working mode of the card, and service mode and service type of the port. For details, see 2.6
Configuring Board Parameters.
l When you create a Client or an ODUk trail in a network that consists of NG WDM NEs, you can create
the trail on an OCh server trail directly. Specifically, cross-layer creation is supported and the U2000
can create mid-layer server trails automatically.

In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow diagram, the main phases of managing an
WDM network by using the end-to-end function of the U2000 are shown, that is, configuring
and maintaining a trail. All these functions require the corresponding license that provides the
end-to-end management function.
The portrait orientation of the flow chart shows the relations between operation tasks in each
phase.
2-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.1.2 Basic Concepts


This section describes the basic concepts of the WDM end-to-end management.
2.1.2.1 WDM Trail
The concept, type and relevant information about trails are described here.
2.1.2.2 Conflict Trail
If a trail exists on the U2000, but the cross-connection that forms the trail does not exist at the
NE layer, this trail is a conflict trail.
2.1.2.3 Trail Creation Method
The U2000 provides multiple methods for creating trails to meet different operation habits of
users and requirements of different service scenarios.
2.1.2.4 Process for Creating a Trail
The trail creation process describes a series of procedures before a trail is generated on the
U2000. The detailed process varies with the creation method.
2.1.2.5 Platinum Service Group
The platinum service group is the combination of multiple WDM trails. Any two trails in the
group do not pass through the same NE, fiber, or fiber/cable pipe. In this way, services are not
hardly interrupted.

2.1.2.1 WDM Trail


The concept, type and relevant information about trails are described here.
The U2000 enables you to create, search, view, join, split, and delete WDM trails. In addition,
the U2000 provides the signal flow diagram that visually displays the signal flow and the
transmission media layer route of trails. This facilitates operations and improves the maintenance
efficiency.
Currently the U2000 provides the following OTN trail modules that comply with ITU-T G.872:
l

Client trail

ODUk trail: optical channel data unit (ODUk) trail

OTUk trail: optical channel transport (OTUk) unit trail

OCh trail: optical channel trail

OMS trail: optical multiplexing section trail

OTS trail: optical transmission section trail

OSC trail: optical supervisory channel (OSC) trail


NOTE

l The first six types are related to services, and the OSC trail is related to supervisory signals.
l The OTS trail cannot be deleted from the U2000. You must delete the fiber connection before deleting
the OTS trail.
l The rate level varies with the value of "k" in ODUk/OTUk. For details, see Table 2-1. ODU5G/OTU5G
is a level customized by Huawei.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-5

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Table 2-1 ODUk rate level


Trail Level

Rate (bit/s)

ODU0

1.25G

ODU1/OTU1

2.5G

ODU5G/OTU5G

5G

ODU2/OTU2

10G

ODU3/OTU3

40G

Trail Module
Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 illustrate the relationship and location of the trails.
Figure 2-2 Trail
Client
ODUk
OTUk
OCh
OMS
OTS

OTS

OTS

NOTE

l In the case of the traditional WDM equipment, such as the OptiX BWS 1600G, an OMS trail terminates
at the FIU cards.
l In the case of the NG WDM equipment, such as the OptiX OSN 6800, an OMS trail terminates at the
MUX and DMUX cards.

Figure 2-3 OSC Trail


OSC Trail

TM

OSC Trail

RM

2-6

RM

OSC

OSC

OTM

TM

FIU

FIU

OLA

OSC

FIU

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

FIU

OTM

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

ODUk Trail
Different from other trails, an ODUk/OTUk sets the source and sink at the internal ports of an
OTU card, a tributary card or a line card. Figure 2-4 displays a typical ODUk trail module whose
source and sink are set on the internal ports of tributary ports or of line cards.
Figure 2-4 ODUk (k = 1, 2, ...) trail
NS2

TQS
STM-16
RX1

LP1
O
D
U
1

NS2

ODU1
O
D
U
2

TQS
LP1

ODU1
O
T
U
2

OUT

IN

O
T
U
2

O
D
U
2

O
D
U
1

STM-16
TX1

OCh Trail

OTU2 Trail
ODU2 Trail
ODU1 Trail
Client Trail

Electrical Signal
Optical Signal

In the case of the client-side service whose rate is less than 1.25 Gbit/s, an ODU0 trail is added,
as shown in Figure 2-5.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-7

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-5 ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, ...) trail


52NS2

52TOM
GE

ODU0

RX1

LP1

ODU1

O
D
U
1

O
D
U
2

O
T
U
2

52TOM

52NS2

OUT

IN

O
T
U
2

ODU1

LP1

O
D
U
2

O
D
U
1

GE

ODU0

TX1

OCh Trail
OTU2 Trail
ODU2 Trail
ODU1 Trail
ODU0 Trail
Client Trail

Electrical Signal
Optical Signal

Inverse Multiplexing Trail


The rate of the client layer of an inverse multiplexing trail is greater than the rate of the server
layer. Hence, an inverse multiplexing client trail needs multiple trails to serve as its server layer.
Currently, you can only search for an inverse multiplexing trail, but you cannot create an endto-end inverse multiplexing trail.
An inverse multiplexing client trail can take an ODU1 or ODU2 trail as the server trail. That is,
an inverse multiplexing client trail cannot take ODU1 and ODU2 trails as the server trails at the
same time.

40G inverse multiplexing trail model


The transmission rate of a single wavelength is 40G, but a single wavelength cannot used for
long-distance transmission due to an optical layer index (such as dispersion) restriction. In a
40G inverse multiplexing transmission scheme, a 40G signal is converted to four 10G ODU2
signals, each of which uses one wavelength. This is equal to four 10G signals on the line side
and lowers the optical layer index requirement.
Figure 2-6 shows the inverse multiplexing trail model of the TSXL card. You cannot
dynamically adjust the bandwidth of STM-256 or OC768 services whose rate is 40G. Hence,
you can search for a client trail only after you configure four ODU2 trails. If you configure only
one, two or three ODU2 trails, services are unavailable and you fail to search for the client trail.

2-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-6 40G inverse multiplexing trail

10G inverse multiplexing trail model


The TDX card is a 10G inverse multiplexing tributary card that has two individual transmission
paths. Each path inversely multiplexes a 10G service to multiple ODU1 signals, which are crossconnected to a line card for transmission. The 10G service uses any or all of the four ODU1
signals according to bandwidth status. When the 10G service does not use all of the four ODU1
signals, the 10G service share an ODU2 trail with other ODU1 signals. This saves line resources.
Figure 2-7 shows the inverse multiplexing trail model of the IP3 port on the TDX card. A 10G
service is an Ethernet service for which you can dynamically adjust bandwidth. The server layer
allows one, two, three or four ODU1 trails. Hence, the client trail that you search out is of
different rate levels.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-9

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-7 10G inverse multiplexing trail

2.1.2.2 Conflict Trail


If a trail exists on the U2000, but the cross-connection that forms the trail does not exist at the
NE layer, this trail is a conflict trail.

Cause
A trail consists of a single station cross-connection at the NE layer. If the configuration data at
the NE layer changes and a complete trail cannot be formed at the network layer, the trail that
exists on the U2000 is a conflict trail, and the corresponding cross-connection at the NE layer
becomes a discrete service.
l

Adding a fiber leads to trail extension.


Assume that a trail is NE A-> NE B. Create a fiber from NE B to NE C, and create a service
on NE C. As a result, the trail is extended as NE A->NE C. The trail NE A-> NE B that
exists on the U2000 becomes a conflict trail. See Figure 2-8.
Figure 2-8 A conflict trail generated because a fiber is added

NE A

l
2-10

NE B

NE C

The single station cross-connection is lost.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

The original trail is NE A-> NE C. The cross-connection of the trail on NE B is deleted.


On the U2000, the original trail of NE A-> NE C becomes a conflict trail and services on
NE A and NE C become discrete services. See Figure 2-9.
Figure 2-9 A conflict trail generated because a single station cross-connection is lost

NE A

NE B

NE C

Delete a protection service on a per-NE basis.


NE 1 and NE 2 comprises a 1+1 linear protection and the original trail is NE 1-> NE 2. If
cross-connection D of NE 2 is deleted, the original trail of NE 1-> NE 2 becomes a conflict
trail. See Figure 2-10.
Figure 2-10 A conflict trail generated because a protection service is deleted on a per-NE
basis
Cross-Connection
A

Cross-Connection
B

Working Trail

Protection Trail

NE1

Cross-Connection
C

Cross-Connection
D
NE2

Handling Method
During trail search, if the U2000 searches out a conflict trail, the U2000 stops the searching and
asks you to confirm the conflict trail. There are the following two handling methods:
l

Stop searching.
If you fail to verify that the conflict trail is correct, you can choose to stop searching. The
conflict trail remains, but the U2000 does not generate a new trail.

Continue to search.
The system deletes the conflict trail from the network layer. This operation does not delete
the cross-connection on a per-NE basis, and does not affect services on the NE.
NOTE

After the conflict trail is deleted, its customized information, including the trail name, remarks, is
permanently lost and cannot be restored.

2.1.2.3 Trail Creation Method


The U2000 provides multiple methods for creating trails to meet different operation habits of
users and requirements of different service scenarios.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-11

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

To successfully create a trail on the U2000, the following prerequisites must be met:
l

All the NEs that the trail passes through must have enough idle resources.

The data on the U2000 must be consistent with the data on the NE.

The fibers on the U2000 are correctly connected.

Table 2-2 shows the methods, features, and application scenarios of the trail creation.
Table 2-2 Comparison of methods for creating trails
Trail Creation Method

Feature

Application Scenario

Creating trails by trail search On a per-NE basis, configure


all nodes that a service passes
through. Then, by using the
network-layer trail search
function, combine crossconnections of each node to
form end-to-end trails.

This method is applicable to


the scenario that the service is
already configured on a perNE basis.

l The service is configured


directly at the network
layer. After the activation
of the trail, the U2000
deliver the crossconnections related to the
trail to all NEs involved.

This method is applicable to


the creation of multi-layer
OTN trails and a majority of
normal trails.

Creating trails in the


automatic mode

This method requires better


technical knowledge of
users. During the search,
users may need to handle
conflict trails and discrete
services.

l The route can be


computed automatically.
l If multiple routes exist
between the selected
source and sink, you can
set the compulsory link,
the prohibited node to
select a route.

2-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Trail Creation Method

Feature

Application Scenario

Creating trails by trail


replication

l The service is configured


directly at the network
layer. After the activation
of the trail, the U2000
deliver the crossconnections related to the
trail to all NEs involved.

This method is applicable to


the batch creation of trails
with the same route, that is,
the trails share the same
source, sink, and server trail
with the original trail.

l The route can be


computed automatically.
l You can only use the
exsiting trail on the
U2000 as a template and
create the trails with the
same route in batches.

2.1.2.4 Process for Creating a Trail


The trail creation process describes a series of procedures before a trail is generated on the
U2000. The detailed process varies with the creation method.
Figure 2-11 shows the process for creating trails by trail search. Figure 2-12 shows the process
for creating trails in the automatic mode.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-13

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-11 Creating trails by trail search


Start

Obtain all cross-connections


of NEs networkwide

Sort cross-connections by level

Search out trails at the server


layer and then the client layer

Check whether
new trails conflict with
original trails

Delete conflicting trails

The network management


system starts to manage
new trails

The searched is paused and


conflicting trails are displayed

Whether to resume
the search
N
Stop the trail search

Check whether
discrete services that do
not form trails exist
Y
N

The information about discrete


services is displayed

End

2-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-12 Creating trails in the automatic mode


Start

Check whether the


server trail for the trail to
be created exists

Create or search out the


server trail

Y
Set trail attributes, such as the
direction, level, and rate

Set the source and sink NEs


for the trail

Set route restriction conditions


related to the node, link, and
timeslot (optional)

Whether to set the


trail as an SNCP trail

Set the SNCP protection route

N
Set basic attributes for the trail

Activate the trail

End

2.1.2.5 Platinum Service Group


The platinum service group is the combination of multiple WDM trails. Any two trails in the
group do not pass through the same NE, fiber, or fiber/cable pipe. In this way, services are not
hardly interrupted.
As shown in Figure 2-13, a bidirectional service exists between Router1 and Router2 and this
service is displayed as trail A between NE1 and NE2 in the management scope of the U2000.
To protect the service, another bidirectional trail needs to be added between the two routers and
this trail is displayed as trail B between NE3 and NE4 in the management scope of the U2000.
When you create trail B, trail A is considered as a reference trail so that the two trails do not
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-15

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

pass through the same NE, fiber, or fiber/cable pipe. In this way, the risk that the two trails are
interrupted at the same time is lowered. Therefore, trail A and trail B form a platinum service
group.
Figure 2-13 Platinum service group

The platinum service group must meet the requirements as follows:


l

A platinum service group contains a minimum of two trails.

The trails cannot pass through the same NEs.

The trails cannot pass through the same fiber.

The trails cannot pass through the same fiber/cable pipes.


NOTE

The preceding constraints do not apply to a trail under protection. For example, the protection trails for
two SNCP services travel along the same fiber/cable pipe. The platinum service group that the two
protection trails belong to is Normal. In this case, a downgrade alarm does not occur.

When a third trail needs to be added into the platinum service group, you only need to specify
the existing trail A or trail B as the reference trail and then the U2000 automatically searches
out the two existing trails and groups the three trails.
NOTE

You can also bind the existing trails to generate a platinum service group.

As shown in Figure 2-13, when the platinum service group is no longer required, you can remove
trail B from the platinum service group instead of deleting trail B. In this way, trail A and trail
B are independent of each other and their routes are not mutually constrained. If rerouting occurs
or the route is modified, the two trails may pass through the same NE, fiber, and fiber/cable pipe.
When you create trails, different trails cannot fully comply with the requirements of the platinum
services due to insufficient resources and then you can create downgraded platinum services.
As shown in Figure 2-14, trail A and trail B pass through NE5 and thus you can create only a
downgraded platinum service group. A downgraded platinum service group cannot provide the
expected protection of a platinum service group. For example, when NE5 is faulty, the
connection between Router1 and Router2 is interrupted. To make the service group fully comply
with the requirements of the platinum service, you can change the route of trail B to the route
of trail C between NE3 and NE4, when resources are sufficient.
2-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-14 Downgraded platinum service group

A platinum service group contains multiple trails. Therefore, the service is not interrupted unless
all trails are interrupted. After detecting the interruption of a certain trail, the U2000 checks
whether other trails in the platinum service group are interrupted. If a complete trail exists, the
severity of the service interruption alarm is reduced to a lower level.
When the platinum service group does not meet the requirements due to a certain cause, the
platinum service group is in the downgraded state and the U2000 reports an alarm about the
downgrade of the platinum service.

2.1.3 Creating WDM Trails by Trail Search


After a new network is set up or services are configured on a per-NE basis, you need to perform
an WDM trail search so that you can manage configured services by using the trail management
function.
2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM Trails
After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail
information does not exist in the network layer of the U2000. To manage WDM trails, you need
to search for the data of cross-connections and fiber connections over the network to generate
end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.
2.1.3.2 Viewing Discrete Services
If some cross-connections on an NE cannot form trails at the network layer and are isolated on
the NE, these cross-connections are called discrete services. By using the U2000, you can view
the details of a discrete service and the signal flow diagram of the trail where the discrete service
is transmitted, and analyze the cause of the discrete service. This improves the maintainability
of the discrete services of the U2000.
2.1.3.3 Activating and Deactivating Discrete Services
If certain cross-connections on NEs cannot form network-layer trails but exist on NEs separately,
these cross-connections are called discrete services. Deactivating discrete services deletes the
NE cross-connections from NEs and saves the relevant data on the U2000 only. This operation
helps to release the occupied channels. On the contrary, activating discrete services deploys
cross-connections to NEs according to the data saved on the U2000.
2.1.3.4 Acknowledging or Unacknowledging Discrete Services
In this user interface, you can acknowledge discrete services and filter discrete services based
on their acknowledgment status.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-17

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.1.3.5 Deleting Discrete Services


Discrete services occupy the cross-connections required by normal services. As a result, normal
services cannot be created. Therefore, you need to delete the discrete services that are not in use.

2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM Trails


After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail
information does not exist in the network layer of the U2000. To manage WDM trails, you need
to search for the data of cross-connections and fiber connections over the network to generate
end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Fiber connections must be created correctly for the WDM equipment.

Among the five types of trails, only the OTS trail can be managed directly without being
searched, because the data is stored at the network layer when fibers are created.

The networking in which no fiber connection exists between cross-connections of the same
level is not supported.

The U2000 supports the ability to search for an unterminated trail.

The U2000 supports the ability to search for a WDM trail that has multiple sources and
sinks.

The U2000 supports the ability to restore the user-defined information. When you delete a
trail from the network layer of the U2000, the user-defined information of the trail is saved
in the system. Hence, when you search for a trail that has the same source or sink and
direction as the deleted trail, you can restore the user-defined information.

You can only search for an inverse multiplexing client trail.

Context

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.

2-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

l In the mode of searching by subnet, the selected subnet range should be independent from the
networking aspect. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the area
that beyond the selected subnet range.
l If you select Hide optional trails, the third-party wavelength services can be searched out because
they are not filtered out during verification.

Step 3 Click Next to begin to search for trails. The U2000 takes some time to return the results,
depending on the number of services.
NOTE

l If there are cross-connections that are collisions and these cross-connections cannot form end to end
trails, the U2000 shows the conflicting trails after you perform the search operation.
l The principles of verifying a conflict trail are as follows: The networking changes. The trail may cause
interruption of service flow. For example, the key information of the trail, including deleting a crossconnection or fiber, is verified.

Step 4 Optional: Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. Select the trail to set the trail
management flag.
NOTE

Skip this step if the Automatically create trails after searching policy is selected in Step 2.

Step 5 Click Next to view all discrete services in the target network.
NOTE

If Step 4 is executed, the U2000 deletes trails that do not have the management flag from the network layer.
This does not affect services of the actual NE or the data of an individual NE on the U2000.

Step 6 After the search is complete, click Finish.


----End

2.1.3.2 Viewing Discrete Services


If some cross-connections on an NE cannot form trails at the network layer and are isolated on
the NE, these cross-connections are called discrete services. By using the U2000, you can view
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-19

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

the details of a discrete service and the signal flow diagram of the trail where the discrete service
is transmitted, and analyze the cause of the discrete service. This improves the maintainability
of the discrete services of the U2000.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

Context
To ensure the correctness of the discrete service data, you can perform a trail search before
viewing discrete services. For details, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM Trails.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Discrete Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the prompt dialog box, click OK.
Step 3 In the Set Discrete Service Browse Filter Conditions dialog box, set the filter criteria, and
click Filter. In the WDM Discrete Service Management list, the details of discrete services
are displayed.
Step 4 In the list, select a discrete service.
Step 5 Optional: At the bottom of the window, click the Transmission Media Layer Route tab. On
this tab page, you can view the NE that carries the cross-connection.
Step 6 Optional: At the bottom of the window, click the Signal Flow Diagram tab. On this tab page,
you can view the signal flow of the trail where the discrete service is transmitted and analyze
the cause of the discrete service.
NOTE

Due to the loss of cross-connections or fibers, only part of the trail where the discrete service is transmitted
is displayed in the Signal Flow Diagram. That is, this part of the trail contains the discrete service and is
terminated at a missing cross-connection or fiber.

----End

2.1.3.3 Activating and Deactivating Discrete Services


If certain cross-connections on NEs cannot form network-layer trails but exist on NEs separately,
these cross-connections are called discrete services. Deactivating discrete services deletes the
NE cross-connections from NEs and saves the relevant data on the U2000 only. This operation
helps to release the occupied channels. On the contrary, activating discrete services deploys
cross-connections to NEs according to the data saved on the U2000.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Discrete Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the prompt dialog box, click OK.
2-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 3 In the Set Discrete Service Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria, and click
Filter.
Step 4 Optional: Select one or more inactive discrete services, right-click, and then choose Active
from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Optional: Select one or more active discrete services, right-click, and then choose Deactivate
from the shortcut menu.
NOTE

When activating or deactivating discrete services in batches each time, you can select a maximum number
of 1,000 records. Otherwise, the Active or Deactivate menu grays out.

Step 6 In the prompt dialog box, click OK.


Step 7 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
----End

2.1.3.4 Acknowledging or Unacknowledging Discrete Services


In this user interface, you can acknowledge discrete services and filter discrete services based
on their acknowledgment status.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Context
Discrete services occupy network resources and this may affect the successful creation of trails.
Therefore, you can acknowledge unnecessary cross-connections. In this way, another network
maintainer can determine whether a discrete service is an unnecessary cross-connection based
on the acknowledgment status. If unnecessary, the maintainer deletes the service.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Discrete Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box displayed, click OK.
Step 3 In the Set Discrete Service Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set filter criteria and click
Filter.
Step 4 Optional: In the list, select one or more discrete services that are not acknowledged, right-click,
and choose Acknowledge from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Optional: In the list, select one or more discrete services that are acknowledged, right-click,
and choose Cancel Acknowledgement from the shortcut menu.
Step 6 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
NOTE

Right-click one or more discrete services and choose Remarks from the shortcut menu. In the Remarks
dialog box, enter detailed descriptions of the discrete services.

----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-21

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Result
l

If a discrete service is acknowledged, Acknowledge Status of the service is Yes.

If a discrete service is not acknowledged yet, Acknowledge Status of the service is No.

When viewing discrete services, you can filter the services based on their acknowledgment
status.

To release resources, you can delete the discrete services that are acknowledged. For
detailed operations, see 2.1.3.5 Deleting Discrete Services.

Postrequisite

2.1.3.5 Deleting Discrete Services


Discrete services occupy the cross-connections required by normal services. As a result, normal
services cannot be created. Therefore, you need to delete the discrete services that are not in use.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The discrete services to be deleted must be in the inactive state.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Discrete Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the prompt dialog box, click OK.
Step 3 In the Set Discrete Service Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria, and click
Filter.
Step 4 Select one or more discrete services to be deleted, right-click, and then choose Delete from the
shortcut menu.
NOTE

When deleting discrete services in batches each time, you cannot select inactive and active discrete services
and can select a maximum number of 1,000 records. Otherwise, the Delete menu grays out.

Step 5 In the prompt dialog box, click OK.


Step 6 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
----End

2.1.4 Configuring WDM Trails


After searching out the relevant trail information on the U2000, you can create OCh, ODUk or
client trails by specifying the sources and sinks of the trails.
2.1.4.1 Creating an OCh Trail
The U2000 supports creating OCh trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the source
and sink of a service, the U2000 can generate an OCh trail based on the searched server trail.
The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure and ensures
proper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible manner in
application scenarios (deployment or expansion).Before creating an EAPE pair, you should
2-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

create OCh trails. The EAPE function uses OCh trails to identify EAPE pairs. In the case of the
equipment with the dynamic optical cross-connection boards, you can create OCh trails manually
by using the trail management function of the U2000.
2.1.4.2 Creating an ODUk Trail
The U2000 supports creating ODUk trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the source
and the sink of a service, the U2000 automatically searches for the server trail and creates the
ODUk trail. The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure and
ensures proper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible manner
in application scenarios such as deployment or expansion.
2.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails
The U2000 supports creating client trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the source
and sink of a service, the U2000 generates a client trail based on the searched or created server
trail. The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure and ensures
proper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible manner in
application scenarios such as deployment or expansion.
2.1.4.4 Creating a Mono Nodal Trail
The trails created on the same NE are called mono nodal trails. A mono nodal trail is created
based on inter-card cross-connections. If the inter-card cross-connection is not supported, a mono
nodal trail is created based on fibers.
2.1.4.5 Creating a Multi-Layer OTN Trail
When you create a Client trail or an ODUk trail for the NG WDM, an intermediate server trail
is automatically created at the OCh server layer without creating the trail at each layer. This
simplifies the operations.

2.1.4.1 Creating an OCh Trail


The U2000 supports creating OCh trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the source
and sink of a service, the U2000 can generate an OCh trail based on the searched server trail.
The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure and ensures
proper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible manner in
application scenarios (deployment or expansion).Before creating an EAPE pair, you should
create OCh trails. The EAPE function uses OCh trails to identify EAPE pairs. In the case of the
equipment with the dynamic optical cross-connection boards, you can create OCh trails manually
by using the trail management function of the U2000.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The OMS server trail must be searched out.

Context
The U2000 supports the function of creating a third-party wavelength service. A third-party
wavelength service is the OCh trail whose source or sink port is located on the multiplexing and
demultiplexing card or the add/drop multiplexing card, or whose source and sink ports are located
on such cards.
The U2000 does not support the ability to reuse discrete cross-connections.
The source and sink of an OCh trail are the ports at the line side of the OTU boards. The boards
that the trail passes should support dynamic optical cross-connection or should contain static
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-23

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

optical cross-connection. The boards that support the dynamic optical cross-connection are
classified by equipment domain as follows:
l

For the OptiX BWS 1600G and the OptiX BWS 1600A: WSM9, WSD9, WSM5, WSD5
and RMU9.

For the OptiX Metro 6100V1E: WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, and WSMD4.

For the OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 I/8800 II and OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A/8800 I(NA)/
8800 II(NA): WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, ROAM, WSMD4, 11RDU9, 11WSMD2, 12WSM9,
12WSD9, 13WSM9, 13WSD9, RDU6, WSM6.

Typical OCh networking scenarios are as follows:


l

The typical scenario of non-protected OCh networking is as follows:


ONE2
O
T
U

OCh

ONE1

O
T
U

OCh
D40

OT U

FIU

FIU

ONE3

M40

OSC

FIU

WSM

WSD

OT U

FIU

OSC

OSC

OCh

fiber
oxc

The typical scenario of protected OCh networking is as follows:


ONE2

ONE1

F
I
U
O
T
U

ONE4

OSC

OSC

F
I
U

WSD

O
L
P

OSC

WSM

F
I
U

F
I
U

O
L
P

ONE3
F
I
U

OSC

F
I
U

WSM

WSD

O
T
U

F
I
U

F
I
U

OSC

OSC

OCh

fiber
oxc

Networking scenarios of creating a third-party wavelength service or an unterminated OCh trail


are as follows:
l

2-24

The following figures shows the third-party wavelength service whose source or sink is the
third-party equipment.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

The following figures shows the third-party wavelength service whose source and sink are
the third-party equipment.

NOTE

l In the WDM service configuration window, you can view the resource allocation of the entire network in
an intuitive manner. When you create a service, available resources are automatically filtered and displayed
in the topology view. The available resources can be the server links of the OTS level or higher levels
between NEs.
l When you create a trail, Auto-Calculation is selected by default. Route calculation is triggered when you
specify the source, sink, or route constraints, or configure protection. If the route calculation fails, an error
message is displayed indicating the failure causes.
l If you clear the selection of Auto-Calculation, routes are not automatically calculated when you create a
trail. You can click to Calculate Route check the correctness of a route.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 Set the level and direction of the service.
Set the level to OCh and set the direction according to the specific networking.
Step 3 Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog box,
select the NE, card, and port.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-25

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management


TIP

l During the selection of source or sink in the NE Panel, when you move the cursor to a board, the
wavelength information of the board port is displayed.
l By default, if you already select one end (source or sink) of a trail and open the NE Panel to select
another end, the U2000 uses the board and port that have the same band and wavelength with priority.
l After you select the Enable third-party wavelength service port check box in the lower portion of
the window, you can create a trail whose source or sink is located on the multiplexing and
demultiplexing card (for example, M40 and D40) or the add/drop multiplexing card (for example, MR2
and WSM9), or whose source and sink ports are located on such cards. This trail is a third-party
wavelength service.
NOTE

l By default, the selected wavelength frequency is the current wavelength frequency of a (source) sink port.
You can select another proper wavelength frequency to meet the actual requirements.
l After the wavelength frequency for a source (sink) port is selected, the same wavelength frequency is selected
first for the corresponding sink (source) port. If the same wavelength frequency is not available for the
corresponding sink (source) port, the current wavelength frequency of the selected sink (source) port is
selected by default.

Step 4 Optional: Specify route constraints.


1.

Click the Explicit Link tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut
menu. In the Add Explicit Link window, you can search for the existing server trails and
set them as the explicit links of the trails to be created. You can select only the topmost
server trail.

2.

Click the Explicit Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut
menu. In the Add Explicit Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and set
them as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

3.

Click the Excluded Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut
menu. In the Add Excluded Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and set
them as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

4.

Specify the route channel. Click Specify Route Channel. In the Specify Route Channel
dialog box, you can modify the topmost server trail for the working route.

5.

Click Cancel Route Restriction to cancel the settings.


TIP

You can also specify route constraints in the topology view. When you create a service, the server links of
the OTS level or higher levels are automatically filtered and displayed in green in the topology view. After
routes are successfully calculated, the working route is displayed in blue between the source and sink NEs.
l Specify the explicit link. Click a server trail between the NEs to specify the explicit route. Click the
trail again to cancel the selection. Click a server link in green between the source and sink NEs. In the
dialog box that is displayed, specify the explicit server trails of all levels for the service. Click the trail
again to cancel the selection.
l Specify the explicit node. Click the Explicit Node tab. Double-click an NE to specify the explicit NE
of the route. This NE is shown as the icon. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.
l Specify the excluded node. Click the Excluded Node tab. You can specify the NE that the route of the
trail to be created is not allowed to pass through by double-clicking the NE. The selected NE is marked
with

sign. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

l Specify the route channel. Right-click the working route in blue and choose Trail Channel
Selection from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the topmost server trail
for the working route.

2-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

After routes are successfully calculated, the list of the server routes for the trail to be created are displayed
in the lower portion of the topology view.
Choose Browse Relevant Trails from the shortcut menu to switch to the WDM Trail Management
window. In this window, you can view the details of the server trail of the trail to be created. The fiber does
not support this function.

Step 5 Configure general attributes. Click the General Attributes, set the general trail attributes,
including the name and ID.
Step 6 Optional: Before deploying the configuration of a service, you can perform the following
operations as required.
l

Click OPA Mode. In the OPA Mode dialog box, set the optical power adjustment mode
to Auto or Manual for the OCh trail to be created. For details, see 2.1.9.10 Modifying the
Optical Power Adjustment Mode of a WDM Trail.

Select the Activate the Trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after it
is created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on the
U2000.

If you select the Set Optical Power After Creation check box, after you create a trail
successfully, the Optical Power Management window is displayed for you to learn the
relevant optical power. For details of the function, see 2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Power
for the Trails.

Step 7 Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
----End

Result
After refreshing the WDM Trail Management window, you can view the new WDM trail.
If the route calculation or route creation fails, an error message is displayed indicating the failure
causes. Click Analyze Route. In the Analyze Route dialog box, you can view the details of the
failure causes.

Postrequisite
If a fiber is connected to the source or sink of the new third-party wavelength service, the service
will be extended after a trail search.

2.1.4.2 Creating an ODUk Trail


The U2000 supports creating ODUk trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the source
and the sink of a service, the U2000 automatically searches for the server trail and creates the
ODUk trail. The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure and
ensures proper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible manner
in application scenarios such as deployment or expansion.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The OTU1 ODU1, ODU2, ODU3 or OTU2 server trail must be searched out.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-27

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

If the source or sink is the TOM or 12LQMS card, you must set the working mode of the
card first. For details, see 2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board.

Context
The configuration principles are as follows:
l

The source and sink of an ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3, 5G) trail are LP ports of the TDG, TQM,
or TQS cards. The source and sink of an ODU0 trail are the LP ports of the tributary cards,
such as the 52TOM cards.

The line cards that support the grooming of ODU0 services are as follows: 52NS3, 52NQ2,
52ND2, and 52NS2.

The cards support the grooming of ODU0 services only in the synchronous mode. The
cards, however, do not support the grooming of ODU0 services in the asynchronous mode.
NOTE

In the synchronous mode, the cards (including tributary and line cards) that support the grooming of
ODU0 services work with synchronous cross-connect cards. The cross-connect card can be the
52XCH cards.

Only ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2 trails can be created. ODU5G and ODU3 trails cannot be
created, but can be searched.

If no cross-connect card (for example, XCS card) is available, the tributary card and line
card must be installed in paired slots of the same subrack.

During the installation of cross-connect card (for example, XCS card), the tributary card
and line card must be installed on the same subrack.

An ODU1 trail cannot be created on an OTU1 server trail formed by the networking of the
TQS cards.

Currently, two types of cards support the inverse multiplexing trail. The TSXL card
supports the inverse multiplexing of the 40 Gbit/s service and the TDX card supports the
inverse multiplexing of the 10 Gbit/s service

The U2000 supports the ability to reuse discrete cross-connections.

The U2000 does not support the ability to create a trail whose source and sink use the same
subrack.

The U2000 does not support the ability to create a trail that is terminated at one end.

An example of the ODUk networking scenario is as follows:

2-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management
NS2

TQS
STM-16
RX1

2 End-to-End WDM Management

LP1
O
D
U
1

NS2

ODU1
O
D
U
2

TQS
LP1

ODU1
O
T
U
2

OUT

IN

O
T
U
2

O
D
U
2

O
D
U
1

STM-16
TX1

OCh Trail

OTU2 Trail
ODU2 Trail
ODU1 Trail
Client Trail

Electrical Signal
Optical Signal

NOTE

l In the WDM service configuration window, you can view the resource allocation of the entire network
in an intuitive manner. When you create a service, available resources are automatically filtered and
displayed in the topology view. The available resources can be the server links of the OCh level or
higher levels between NEs.
l When you create a trail, Auto-Calculation is selected by default. Route calculation is triggered when
you specify the source, sink, or route constraints, or configure protection. If the route calculation fails,
an error message is displayed indicating the failure causes.
l If you clear the selection of Auto-Calculation, routes are not automatically calculated when you create
a trail. You can click to Calculate Route check the correctness of a route.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 Set the level, rate and direction of the service.
Step 3 Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog box,
select the NE, card, and port.
Step 4 Optional: Specify route constraints.
1.

Click the Explicit Link tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut
menu. In the Add Explicit Link window, you can search for the existing server trails and
set them as the explicit links of the trails to be created. You can select only the topmost
server trail.

2.

Click the Explicit Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut
menu. In the Add Explicit Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and set
them as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

3.

Click the Excluded Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut
menu. In the Add Excluded Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and set
them as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-29

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

4.
5.

Specify the route channel. Click Specify Route Channel. In the Specify Route Channel
dialog box, you can modify the topmost server trail and the channel for the working route.
Click Cancel Route Restriction to cancel the settings.
TIP

You can also specify route constraints in the topology view. When you create a service, the server links of
the OCh level or higher levels are automatically filtered and displayed in green in the topology view. After
routes are successfully calculated, the working route is displayed in blue between the source and sink NEs.
l Specify the explicit link. Click a server trail between the NEs to specify the explicit route. Click the
trail again to cancel the selection. Click a server link in green between the source and sink NEs. In the
dialog box that is displayed, specify the explicit server trails of all levels for the service. Click the trail
again to cancel the selection.
l Specify the explicit node. Click the Explicit Node tab. Double-click an NE to specify the explicit NE
of the route. This NE is shown as the icon. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.
l Specify the excluded node. Click the Excluded Node tab. You can specify the NE that the route of the
trail to be created is not allowed to pass through by double-clicking the NE. The selected NE is marked
with

sign. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

l Specify the route channel. Right-click the working route in blue and choose Trail Channel
Selection from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the topmost server trail
and the channel for the working route.

Step 5 Optional: Configure protection. Click the Protection Setting tab. Configure the SNCP
protection route.
1.

Set the dual fed node and selective receiving node. Right-click the area in the tab and choose
Add from the shortcut menu. In the Add the dual-fed and selective-receiving node
displayed, select Dual-Fed Point and Selective-Receiving Point. Click OK.

2.

Specify the protection route channel. Click Protection Setting. In the Specify Route
Channel dialog box, specify the topmost server trail and the channel for the protection
route and click OK.

3.

Click Delete Protection Setting.


TIP

After you click the Protection Setting tab, you can configure the SNCP protection route in the topology
view. After routes are successfully calculated, the protection route is displayed in pink between the source
and sink NEs.
l Specify the dual fed node. Right-click the dual-fed point and choose Set Dual-Fed Point, and the NE
is displayed as

l Specify the selective receiving node. Right-click the selective-receiving point and choose Set SelectiveReceiving Point, and the NE is displayed as

l Specify the protection route channel. Right-click the protection route in pink and choose Specify Route
Channel from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the topmost server trail
and the channel for the protection route.

2-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

After routes are successfully calculated, the list of the server routes for the trail to be created and the list
of new dynamic cross-connections are displayed in the lower portion of the topology view.
l Click the About Server Layer Route tab. In the list, right-click a route and then perform the following
operations:
l Choose Browse Relevant Trails from the shortcut menu to switch to the WDM Trail
Management window. In this window, you can view the details of the server trail of the trail to
be created. The fiber does not support this function.
l Choose Path Setting from the shortcut menu. You can modify the channel for the server trail.
l Click Create Cross-Connection tab to view new dynamic cross-connections.
l If the trail traverses ASON domains, you can select SPC First and click the ASON Trail Parameter
Setting tab to set ASON attributes.

Step 6 Configure general attributes. Click the General Attributes, set the general trail attributes,
including the name and ID.
Step 7 Optional: Before deploying the configuration of a service, you can perform the following
operations as required.
l

Select the Activate the Trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after it
is created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on the
U2000.

Select the Copy after Creation check box. Then, you can create multiple trails whose share
the same routes but have different channels.

If you select the Set Optical Power After Creation check box, after you create a trail
successfully, the Optical Power Management window is displayed for you to learn the
relevant optical power. For details of the function, see 2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Power
for the Trails.

Step 8 Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
NOTE

If you select Port Attribute, the Port Information dialog box is displayed. In the list, the ports where all
or part of the attributes can be modified are displayed. Double-click the required port to modify. For details
of parameters, see Configure Port.

----End

Result
After refreshing the WDM Trail Management window, you can view the new WDM trail.
If the route calculation or route creation fails, an error message is displayed indicating the failure
causes. Click Analyze Route. In the Analyze Route dialog box, you can view the details of the
failure causes.

2.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails


The U2000 supports creating client trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the source
and sink of a service, the U2000 generates a client trail based on the searched or created server
trail. The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure and ensures
proper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible manner in
application scenarios such as deployment or expansion.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-31

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

An OCh or ODUk server trail is correctly searched out or created.

If the source or sink is the TOM or 12LQMS card, you must set the working mode of the
card first. For details, see 2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board.

If the source or sink is the TOM or TQM card, you must set the service type at the port on
the card first. For details, see 2.6.4 Configuring the Service Type.

If the 11TOM or 12LQMD cards are configured at the source or sink ends, you must
configure the service mode for the cards when certain services, such as OTU1 services,
traverse the cards. For details, see 2.6.2 Configuring the Service Mode.

Context
The restrictions for configuring cross-connections and networking are as follows:
l

The working route and protection route of WXCP/SNCP trails must be different server
trails.

Currently, the U2000 only supports the Client trails created based on the ODUk server trails
in a network composed all by NG WDM equipment. The server trail can be ODU1 trail,
ODU5G trail and ODU2 trail.

The U2000 supports the creation and search for the Client trails using the SW SNCP
scheme.

For the dual-fed OTU, if services are configured at only one port, the client trail cannot be
created even if the OCh trail is searched out.

The U2000 supports the ability to create a mono nodal trail.


NOTE

l In the WDM service configuration window, you can view the resource allocation of the entire network
in an intuitive manner. When you create a service, available resources are automatically filtered and
displayed in the topology view. The available resources can be the server links of the OCh level or
higher levels between NEs.
l When you create a trail, Auto-Calculation is selected by default. Route calculation is triggered when
you specify the source, sink, or route constraints, or configure protection. If the route calculation fails,
an error message is displayed indicating the failure causes.
l If you clear the selection of Auto-Calculation, routes are not automatically calculated when you create
a trail. You can click to Calculate Route check the correctness of a route.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 Set the level, rate and direction of the service.
Step 3 Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog box,
select the NE, card, and port.
Step 4 Optional: Specify route constraints.
1.

2-32

Click the Explicit Link tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut
menu. In the Add Explicit Link window, you can search for the existing server trails and
set them as the explicit links of the trails to be created. You can select only the topmost
server trail.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.

Click the Explicit Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut
menu. In the Add Explicit Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and set
them as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

3.

Click the Excluded Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut
menu. In the Add Excluded Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and set
them as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

4.

Specify the route channel. Click Specify Route Channel. In the Specify Route Channel
dialog box, you can modify the topmost server trail and the channel for the working route.

5.

Click Cancel Route Restriction to cancel the settings.


TIP

You can also specify route constraints in the topology view. When you create a service, the server links of
the OCh level or higher levels are automatically filtered and displayed in green in the topology view. After
routes are successfully calculated, the working route is displayed in blue between the source and sink NEs.
l Specify the explicit link. Click a server trail between the NEs to specify the explicit route. Click the
trail again to cancel the selection. Click a server link in green between the source and sink NEs. In the
dialog box that is displayed, specify the explicit server trails of all levels for the service. Click the trail
again to cancel the selection.
l Specify the explicit node. Click the Explicit Node tab. Double-click an NE to specify the explicit NE
of the route. This NE is shown as the icon. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.
l Specify the excluded node. Click the Excluded Node tab. You can specify the NE that the route of the
trail to be created is not allowed to pass through by double-clicking the NE. The selected NE is marked
with

sign. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

l Specify the route channel. Right-click the working route in blue and choose Trail Channel
Selection from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the topmost server trail
and the channel for the working route.

Step 5 Optional: Configure protection. Click the Protection Setting tab. Configure the SNCP
protection route.
1.

Set the dual fed node and selective receiving node. Right-click the area in the tab and choose
Add from the shortcut menu. In the Add the dual-fed and selective-receiving node
displayed, select Dual-Fed Point and Selective-Receiving Point. Click OK.

2.

Specify the protection route channel. Click Protection Setting. In the Specify Route
Channel dialog box, specify the topmost server trail and the channel for the protection
route and click OK.

3.

Click Delete Protection Setting.


TIP

After you click the Protection Setting tab, you can configure the SNCP protection route in the topology
view. After routes are successfully calculated, the protection route is displayed in pink between the source
and sink NEs.
l Specify the dual fed node. Right-click the dual-fed point and choose Set Dual-Fed Point, and the NE
is displayed as

l Specify the selective receiving node. Right-click the selective-receiving point and choose Set SelectiveReceiving Point, and the NE is displayed as

l Specify the protection route channel. Right-click the protection route in pink and choose Specify Route
Channel from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the topmost server trail
and the channel for the protection route.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-33

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management


NOTE

After routes are successfully calculated, the list of the server routes for the trail to be created and the list
of new dynamic cross-connections are displayed in the lower portion of the topology view.
l Click the About Server Layer Route tab. In the list, right-click a route and then perform the following
operations:
l Choose Browse Relevant Trails from the shortcut menu to switch to the WDM Trail
Management window. In this window, you can view the details of the server trail of the trail to
be created. The fiber does not support this function.
l Choose Path Setting from the shortcut menu. You can modify the channel for the server trail.
l Click Create Cross-Connection tab to view new dynamic cross-connections.
l If the trail traverses ASON domains, you can select SPC First and click the ASON Trail Parameter
Setting tab to set ASON attributes.

Step 6 Configure general attributes. Click the General Attributes, set the general trail attributes,
including the name and ID.
Step 7 Optional: Before deploying the configuration of a service, you can perform the following
operations as required.
l

Select the Activate the Trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after it
is created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on the
U2000.

Select the Copy after Creation check box. Then, you can create multiple trails whose share
the same routes but have different channels.

If you select the Set Optical Power After Creation check box, after you create a trail
successfully, the Optical Power Management window is displayed for you to learn the
relevant optical power. For details of the function, see 2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Power
for the Trails.

Step 8 Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
NOTE

If you select Port Attribute, the Port Information dialog box is displayed. In the list, the ports where all
or part of the attributes can be modified are displayed. Double-click the required port to modify. For details
of parameters, see Configure Port.

----End

Result
After refreshing the WDM Trail Management window, you can view the new WDM trail.
If the route calculation or route creation fails, an error message is displayed indicating the failure
causes. Click Analyze Route. In the Analyze Route dialog box, you can view the details of the
failure causes.

2.1.4.4 Creating a Mono Nodal Trail


The trails created on the same NE are called mono nodal trails. A mono nodal trail is created
based on inter-card cross-connections. If the inter-card cross-connection is not supported, a mono
nodal trail is created based on fibers.

Prerequisite
l
2-34

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Only the mono nodal trails of the Client and ODUk levels can be created.

Server trails are required if trails are created based on fibers between different cards.

Context
There are two circumstances if the source and sink of a mono nodal trail belong to the same NE.
l

Trails created with a single cross-connection based on inter-card cross-connections or intracard cross-connections: These trails do not pass through fibers and are added or dropped
on different cards of the same NE or different ports of the same card.

Trails created between different cards based on fibers (with fiber connection between
cards): These trails pass through fibers and different cards. When creating a mono nodal
trail, check whether server OCh trails and server ODUk trails exist between cards. If yes,
the mono nodal trail can be created.
NOTE

l In the WDM service configuration window, you can view the resource allocation of the entire network
in an intuitive manner. When you create a service, available resources are automatically filtered and
displayed in the topology view. The available resources can be the server links of the OCh level or
higher levels between NEs.
l When you create a trail, Auto-Calculation is selected by default. Route calculation is triggered when
you specify the source, sink, or route constraints, or configure protection. If the route calculation fails,
an error message is displayed indicating the failure causes.
l If you clear the selection of Auto-Calculation, routes are not automatically calculated when you create
a trail. You can click to Calculate Route check the correctness of a route.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 Set the level and direction of the service.
Step 3 Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog box,
select the NE, card, and port.
Step 4 Optional: If the trail passes through fibers:
1.

Click the Trail Setting tab and set the explicit link and excluded node as required in the
Route Constraint area.

2.

Click Specify Route Channel. The Specify Route Channel dialog box is displayed.

3.

Select Server Layer Trail Name, Server Layer Trail, and Channel as required, and click
OK.

Step 5 Configure general attributes. Click the General Attributes, set the general trail attributes,
including the name and ID.
Step 6 Before deploying the configuration of a service, you can perform the following operations as
required.
l

Select the Activate the Trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after it
is created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on the
U2000.

If you select the Set Optical Power After Creation check box, after you create a trail
successfully, the Optical Power Management window is displayed for you to learn the

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-35

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

relevant optical power. For details of the function, see 2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Power
for the Trails.
Step 7 Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
NOTE

If you select Port Attribute, the Port Information dialog box is displayed. In the list, the ports where all
or part of the attributes can be modified are displayed. Double-click the required port to modify. For details
of parameters, see Configure Port.

----End

Result
After refreshing the WDM Trail Management window, you can view the new WDM trail.
If the route calculation or route creation fails, an error message is displayed indicating the failure
causes. Click Analyze Route. In the Analyze Route dialog box, you can view the details of the
failure causes.

2.1.4.5 Creating a Multi-Layer OTN Trail


When you create a Client trail or an ODUk trail for the NG WDM, an intermediate server trail
is automatically created at the OCh server layer without creating the trail at each layer. This
simplifies the operations.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

NG WDM equipment must be used for networking.

Only multi-layer Client trails and ODUk trails can be created.

Optical-layer OCh trails must exist.

Context
On a network consisting of the NG WDM equipment, when you create a multi-layer trail, the
corresponding intermediate server trail, such as the OTU, ODU1, and ODU2 trail, is
automatically created at the OCh server layer during route calculation.
The procedures of creating a multi-layer trail are the same as the procedures of creating a normal
trail.

Procedure
Step 1 Create a multi-layer trail by following the procedures of creating a normal trail.
To Create

See

Client trail

2.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails

ODUk trail

2.1.4.2 Creating an ODUk Trail

----End
2-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.1.5 Creating a Platinum Service


In a platinum service group, the WDM trails do not pass through the same NE, fiber or fiber/
cable pipe, so that the risk that multiple trails are interrupted is lowered.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The U2000 license that is used must support platinum services.

Only the Client and ODUk platinum services can be created.

The levels of the trails in a platinum service group must be consistent.

Context
The procedures of creating a platinum trail are almost the same as the procedures of creating a
non-platinum service, that is, normal service. The only difference is that you need to select a
reference trail for a platinum service. If a reference trail is selected, a platinum service group is
created at the same time. Otherwise, a non-platinum service (normal service) is created.
During the creation of a platinum service, if a reference trail is selected, the U2000 automatically
filters out the NE, fiber, and fiber/cable pipe that the reference trail passes through to calculate
a new route. If this reference trail already belongs to a certain platinum service group, the
U2000 also considers other trails in the platinum service group as reference trails to calculate a
new route.
If the U2000 cannot calculate a route after filtering out the NE, fiber, and fiber/cable pipe that
the reference trail passes through, the U2000 reduces the restrictions. Then, the U2000 calculates
a relatively appropriate route that passes through the preceding NE, fiber, or fiber/cable pipe to
continue the creation. Therefore, a downgraded platinum service group is created.

Procedure
Step 1 Create the trail in the platinum service group according to the procedures of creating a nonplatinum service.
To Create

See

Client trail

2.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails

ODUk trail

2.1.4.2 Creating an ODUk Trail

Step 2 In the Router Constraint area, click the Platinum Service Group tab.
Step 3 Right-click the blank area, and then choose Add from the shortcut menu. In the Set Trail Browse
Filter Conditions dialog box displayed, set the filter criteria and then click Filter. The trails
that meet the criteria are displayed in the list.
Step 4 Select one or more trails of the same level as reference trails, and click OK.
NOTE

If the new trail and the reference trail cannot fully comply with the requirements of the platinum service,
in the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. Then, in the Calculate Platinum Service Trail dialog
box displayed, determine whether to create the downgraded platinum service group. To create the
downgraded platinum service group, click Yes. Otherwise, click No.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-37

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Step 5 Finish other settings and then click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click
Close.
NOTE

If you select Port Attribute, the Port Information dialog box is displayed. In the list, the ports where all
or part of the attributes can be modified are displayed. Double-click the required port to modify. For details
of parameters, see Configure Port.

----End

Result
After refreshing the WDM Trail Management window, you can view the new platinum service.
The Platinum Service Group ID and Platinum Service Group Status parameters indicate the
service group that the trail belongs to and the service group status.
NOTE

By default, the WDM Trail Management window does not display the Platinum Service Group ID and
Platinum Service Group Status parameters. You can display these two parameters by right-clicking the
table head and choosing Platinum Service Group ID and Platinum Service Group Status,
The Platinum Service Group Status field can refresh the status of each trail in the service group in real
time.
l

Normal indicates that the trail is a platinum service.

Degrade indicates that the trail is a degraded platinum service.

- indicates that the trail is not a platinum service.

The system automatically allocates Platinum Service Group ID incrementally. The trails with the same
ID belong to the same platinum service group.

If the route calculation or route creation fails, an error message is displayed indicating the failure
causes. Click Analyze Route. In the Analyze Route dialog box, you can view the details of the
failure causes.

2.1.6 Binding a Platinum Service Group


You can bind a trail or trails when you need to add an existing trail to a platinum service group
or bind existing trails as a platinum service group.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The U2000 license that is used must support platinum services.

Only the Client trails or ODUk trails can be bound.

The levels of the trails to be bound must be the same.

One trail cannot be bound to multiple platinum groups.

Context
The platinum service group can be bound in the following two scenarios:

2-38

A platinum service group already exists. One or more non-platinum services need to be
added.

Bind multiple non-platinum services to a platinum service group.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

In the preceding two scenarios, the levels of the trails must be the same. That is, in the first
scenario, the level of the trail to be added must be the same as the platinum service group. In the
second scenario, the levels of all trails must be the same.
After the binding, the U2000 automatically checks whether the trails in the platinum service
group meet the requirements.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select all the trails that you want to bind, right-click, and then choose Bind Platinum Service
Group from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
----End

Result
You can view the ID and status of a platinum service group in the Platinum Service Group
ID and Platinum Service Group Status fields.
NOTE

By default, the WDM Trail Management window does not display the Platinum Service Group ID and
Platinum Service Group Status parameters. You can display these two parameters by right-clicking the
table head and choosing Platinum Service Group ID and Platinum Service Group Status,
The Platinum Service Group Status field can refresh the status of each trail in the service group in real
time.
l

Normal indicates that the trail is a platinum service.

Degrade indicates that the trail is a degraded platinum service.

- indicates that the trail is not a platinum service.

The system automatically allocates Platinum Service Group ID incrementally. The trails with the same
ID belong to the same platinum service group.

2.1.7 Service Authorization Management


If there are multiple service trails maintained by different operators, they may care about only
the trails in their own responsibility but ignore the other services. Service authorization can filter
the information not in concern of an operator, who then views and manages only the trails in the
responsibility. In this manner, the management and maintenance efficiency is improved.
Figure 2-15 shows four service trails. Trails 1-2 are maintained by operator A and trails 3-4 are
maintained by operator B. By means of service authorization, operator A can maintain only trails
1-2 and cannot maintain trails 3-4 on the U2000. Similarly, operator B cannot maintain trails
1-2.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-39

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-15 Service authorization management

NE1

Trail 1

Trail 2

NE2

NE4
Trail 3

Trail 4

NE3

You can authorize a service to an U2000 user in two modes:


l

Directly authorize the service to an U2000 user.

Specify a customer for the service and authorize the customer to an U2000 user.

Service authorization management must meet the following conditions:


l

A license for service authorization management must be available.

The U2000 user has the operation rights related to service authorization.

2.1.7.1 Specifying a Customer for a Service


You can logically group services for management by specifying customers for them.
2.1.7.2 Authorizing a Customer to a U2000 User
When you authorizing a customer to a U2000 user, you also authorize all the services specified
for the customer to the U2000 user.
2.1.7.3 Authorizing a Trail to a U2000 User
By authorizing a trail to a U2000 user, the U2000 user manages only the trail but ignores other
trails.
2.1.7.4 Modifying Trail Authorization Information
You can view, modify, and delete trail authorization information, if necessary.

2.1.7.1 Specifying a Customer for a Service


You can logically group services for management by specifying customers for them.

Prerequisite

2-40

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The U2000 user that performs such an operation must have the Right- and domain-based
authorization (transport domain) right.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

The service and the customer to be specified for the service must exist.

You can not specify customers for OTS, OMS, OSC level trails.

You can also specify a customer for a trail when creating the trail.

Context

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box displayed, set the filter criteria and click
Filter All. The trails are displayed in the list.
NOTE

l Click Filter All to refresh and display all the qualified trails.
l Click Secondary Filter to filter the trails that are already displayed.
l Click Incremental Filter to add the newly qualified trails to the list without refreshing the trails that
are already displayed.

Step 3 Right-click the trail and choose Details from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, click Customer and select a customer for the service from the dropdown list.
NOTE

The U2000 provides a fuzzy query function, with which you can quickly search for a specific customer
out of many customers.
Customers of ASON-WDM trails and ASON-SDH trails can also be configured in the ASON trail
management window. Therefore, customers configured in this step must be the same as those configured
in the ASON trail management window.

Step 5 Click OK.


----End

2.1.7.2 Authorizing a Customer to a U2000 User


When you authorizing a customer to a U2000 user, you also authorize all the services specified
for the customer to the U2000 user.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network administrator" authority or higher.

The U2000 user that performs such an operation must have the Right- and domain-based
authorization (transport domain) right.

The U2000 user and the customer to be authorized to the U2000 user must exist.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Customer Management from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Right-click the customer and choose Authorize to User from the shortcut menu.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-41

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 3 In the displayed dialog box, select the U2000 user from Available Users in the pane on the left,
and then click

Step 4 Click OK.


----End

2.1.7.3 Authorizing a Trail to a U2000 User


By authorizing a trail to a U2000 user, the U2000 user manages only the trail but ignores other
trails.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network administrator" authority or higher.

The U2000 user that performs such an operation must have the Right- and domain-based
authorization (transport domain) right.

The U2000 user to which the trail is to be authorized must exist and must have the rights
of network maintainer, network operator, or network monitor.

The trail to be authorized must exist.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box displayed, set the filter criteria and click
Filter All. The trails are displayed in the list.
NOTE

l Click Filter All to refresh and display all the qualified trails.
l Click Secondary Filter to filter the trails that are already displayed.
l Click Incremental Filter to add the newly qualified trails to the list without refreshing the trails that
are already displayed.

Step 3 Right-click the trail and choose Confer Rights to User from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the U2000 user from Available Users in the pane on the left,
and then click

Step 5 Click OK.


----End

2.1.7.4 Modifying Trail Authorization Information


You can view, modify, and delete trail authorization information, if necessary.

Prerequisite

2-42

You must be an NM user with "network administrator" authority or higher.

The U2000 user that performs such an operation must have the Right- and domain-based
authorization (transport domain) right.

A trail or customer must be authorized to a U2000 user.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Service Authority from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Select the user from the User List pane in the displayed window.
Step 3 In the pane on the right, view, modify, or delete the trails authorized to the user.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End

2.1.8 Viewing WDM Trails


This section describes how to view the connection relation of all boards on a WDM NE.
2.1.8.1 Viewing Route Information of WDM Trail
The U2000 provides the transmission media route of the trails. You can view the transmission
media layer route to find out the transmission media of the trail.
2.1.8.2 Viewing the Signal Flow Diagram for a WDM Trail
The U2000 provides the signal flow diagram for trails. In the signal flow diagram, you can view
fiber connections between cards on NEs. The signal flow diagram visually displays the flow
direction of optical signals, and facilitates operation and maintenance.
2.1.8.3 Viewing the WDM Single Station Signal Flow Diagram
Inside the WDM NE, the signal flow is transmitted from the OTU to the demultiplexer or
multiplexer, or from the demultiplexer or multiplexer to the optical amplifier. This section
describes how to view the actual signal flow inside a WDM optical NE.
2.1.8.4 Viewing the WDM NE Panel
An NE panel displays the boards and ports of the NE. The icons of all parts use different colors
to show the current status. You can view the NE panel of the NE that a trail passes through in
the Trail Management window.
2.1.8.5 Viewing Relevant Client Trails
At a level higher than sever trails, client trails are used to carry services. By using the U2000,
you can view the client trail information of a specified trail.
2.1.8.6 Browsing Related Server Trails
The U2000 supports querying related server trails. By using this function, you can learn about
the information including status and attributes of a server trail related to the desired trail.
2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Power for the Trails
You can query the optical power for trails. The U2000 provides a way to manage the optical
power that is related to the NE layout, topology structure and routing.
2.1.8.8 Browsing Associated Working and Protection Trails
U2000 supports the function of displaying associated working and protection trails of an optical
NE on an optical layer trail. Through the function of querying a WDM trail, you can view the
other associated working and protection trails of a trail in the trail list.
2.1.8.9 Viewing the Fiber Information of a Trail
During service planning or fault location, you need to query or collect statistics on the
information about the fibers that a trail traverses. The U2000 provides the function of querying
information about the fibers that a trail occupies.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-43

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.1.8.1 Viewing Route Information of WDM Trail


The U2000 provides the transmission media route of the trails. You can view the transmission
media layer route to find out the transmission media of the trail.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

The WDM trails must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Choose a trail and click Transmission Media Layer Route in the bottom portion of the window.
The transmission media is displayed in the bottom window.
NOTE

Hover the cursor over the trail and the source and sink port information of this route is displayed.

----End

2.1.8.2 Viewing the Signal Flow Diagram for a WDM Trail


The U2000 provides the signal flow diagram for trails. In the signal flow diagram, you can view
fiber connections between cards on NEs. The signal flow diagram visually displays the flow
direction of optical signals, and facilitates operation and maintenance.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

There must be correct WDM trails.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail, and select the Signal Flow Diagram tab in the bottom portion of the window. The
signal flow direction of the entire trail is shown.
2-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

Hover the cursor on a trail to display the source and sink port information of that section of the route.

Step 4 Optional: Right-click on the view of signal flow diagram, and choose Legend from the shortcut
menu. The fibers related to the trail are displayed in the signal flow diagram. Dotted lines
represent intra-station fibers and real lines represents inter-station fibers.
NOTE

When there are OLP cards in a network, the working route and protection route are displayed differently in the
signal flow diagram for the selection of signals on the sink port. The following are two display modes for dualfed signals on the source port:
l If the source and sink ports of the OLP card are managed by the same U2000, the working route and protection
route are displayed differently in the signal flow diagram.
l If the source and sink ports of the OLP card are managed by different U2000s, you can specify whether to
display the protection route to meet the actual requirements. By default, the protection route is not displayed
in the case of dual-fed signals on the source port.

Step 5 Customize the name that is displayed in the signal flow diagram. Such a name can contain the
information, such as the shelf name and slot number of a card and the wavelength and frequency
that a trail occupies.
1.

In the signal flow diagram, right-click, and choose Display Mode from the shortcut menu.
On the right of the Signal Flow Diagram pane, the Display Mode tab page is displayed.

2.

Select the parameter that you want to display in the signal flow diagram and click Save. In
the Signal Flow Diagram, the display of names are refreshed according to the new settings.

NOTE

l In the case of an optical-layer trail, the Hide cards at the optical layer parameter is grayed out.
l In the case of an electrical-layer trail, only the cards that the electrical-layer cross-connections traverse
are displayed at the source and sink ends and the optical-layer links are displayed in dotted lines between
the source and sink ends in the Signal Flow Diagram when you select Hide cards at the optical
layer.

Step 6 Optional: If a fiber is displayed in red in the signal flow diagram, right-click it, and choose
Browse Current Alarm from the shortcut menu. The Browse Current Alarms window is
displayed for you to view the alarms of the fiber cut.
NOTE

l You can select only a fiber to view its current alarms.


l Only the R_LOS and MUT_LOS alarms are supported. Otherwise, No occurrence time condition is
selected is displayed in the Browse Current Alarms window.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-45

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 7 Optional: To query the current working route of a trail, select the trail, right-click on the view
of signal flow diagram, and then choose Display valid routes from the shortcut menu. The valid
positive working route is highlighted in green, while the valid negative working route is
highlighted in orange.
NOTE

l The auto-refresh function of the valid routes is supported.


l This function does to support trail groups.

Step 8 Optional: In the signal flow diagram, right-click a card and perform the following operations:
l

Choose Browse Current Alarms from the shortcut menu to view the alarms of the card
on the current trail.

Choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu to view the performance data of the
card on the current trail.

If the selected trail supports Ethernet performance, choose Ethernet Performance from
the shortcut menu to view the Ethernet performance events of the card on the current trail.

Choose WDM Configuration from the shortcut menu to display the NE Explorer and
configure the port attributes of the card.

Step 9 Optional: In the signal flow diagram, right-click the blank area and choose Save View from the
shortcut menu to save the coordinates of the icons in the diagram.
NOTE

After modifying the coordinates of an icon in the signal flow diagram, you can perform the Save View
function. The modified view that you save is displayed when you open the signal flow diagram of the trail
again.

----End

Result
After you perform operations, for example, customizing a name displayed and saving a view,
in the Signal Flow Diagram, the settings takes effect on only the current U2000 client.

2.1.8.3 Viewing the WDM Single Station Signal Flow Diagram


Inside the WDM NE, the signal flow is transmitted from the OTU to the demultiplexer or
multiplexer, or from the demultiplexer or multiplexer to the optical amplifier. This section
describes how to view the actual signal flow inside a WDM optical NE.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

You can only view the single station signal flow diagram of the occupied optical NE.

Procedure
Step 1 In the topology view, double-click an occupied optical NE, and the NE Panel dialog box is
displayed.
Step 2 Click the Signal Flow Diagram tab to view the single station signal flow diagram of the optical
NE.
2-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 3 Optional: Right-click a board, and choose the corresponding item from the shortcut menu to
view the information of the alarms, performance, relevant trails, fibers or optical port parameters.
You can rotate the board placement direction at 90, 180 or 270 degrees.
Step 4 Optional: Right-click in the blank, and choose the corresponding item from the shortcut menu
to print or save the view, or search for a specified board.
l

Choose Print from the shortcut menu, and the Print dialog box is displayed. After setting
the printing information, click Print.

Choose Save View from the shortcut menu, and the Information dialog box is displayed.
Click OK.

Choose Find Board from the shortcut menu, and the Find Board dialog box is displayed.
Enter the desired board name in the Search field, and select Up or Down as the searching
direction. The board you select in the Board Name column is simultaneously located in
the topology view of the signal flow diagram.

----End

2.1.8.4 Viewing the WDM NE Panel


An NE panel displays the boards and ports of the NE. The icons of all parts use different colors
to show the current status. You can view the NE panel of the NE that a trail passes through in
the Trail Management window.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

WDM trails must be searched out or created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-47

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail from the list and click the Transmission Media Layer Route tab in the lower part
of the window.
Step 4 Right-click the required NE in the route diagram, and then choose NE Panel from the shortcut
menu.
----End

Result
By default, the system displays the NE panel of a shelf NE that the trail passes through. If the
trail passes through multiple shelf NEs, the system displays the NE panel of only one shelf NE.

2.1.8.5 Viewing Relevant Client Trails


At a level higher than sever trails, client trails are used to carry services. By using the U2000,
you can view the client trail information of a specified trail.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

The WDM trail must be created or searched out.

Context
In the network models specified in the ITU-T G.872 and G.805, the OTN transport network is
divided.That is, each layer manages its own overheads and each layer can be classified into sublayers and the relationship between the adjacent layers is client and server.
A connection of the client layer is carried by an adjacent server trail for transmission. For
example, the link connection of a OCh trail is provided by a OMS trail, while the link connection
of a Client trail is provided by an OCh or ODUk trail. The OMS layer is the server layer of the
OCh layer, and the OCh trail is the client trail of the OMS layer. The OCh or ODUk layer is the
server trail of the Client layer, and the Client trail is the client trail of the OCh or ODUk trail.
For details of the trail models, refer to 2.1.2.1 WDM Trail.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria and click Filter All.
The trails are displayed in the list.

2-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

l Click Filter All to refresh and display all the qualified trails.
l Click Secondary Filter to filter the trails that are already displayed.
l Click Incremental Filter to add newly qualified trails to the list without refreshing the trails that are
already displayed.

Step 3 Right-click a trail and choose Browse Relevant Client Trails from the shortcut menu. The
corresponding client trails are displayed in the trail list.
----End

2.1.8.6 Browsing Related Server Trails


The U2000 supports querying related server trails. By using this function, you can learn about
the information including status and attributes of a server trail related to the desired trail.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

A WDM trail must be searched out or created.

OTS trails do not support querying related server trails.

Context
In the network models specified in the ITU-T G.872 and G.805, the OTN transport network is
divided.That is, each layer manages its own overheads and each layer can be classified into sublayers and the relationship between the adjacent layers is client and server.
A connection of the client layer is carried by an adjacent server trail for transmission. For
example, the link connection of a OCh trail is provided by a OMS trail, while the link connection
of a Client trail is provided by an OCh or ODUk trail. The OMS layer is the server layer of the
OCh layer, and the OCh trail is the client trail of the OMS layer. The OCh or ODUk layer is the
server trail of the Client layer, and the Client trail is the client trail of the OCh or ODUk trail.
For details of the trail models, refer to 2.1.2.1 WDM Trail.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Right-click a trail and choose Browse Related Server Layer Trails from the shortcut menu.
This trail and the related server trails are displayed in the user interface.
Step 4 You can select another trail to continue the query.
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-49

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Power for the Trails


You can query the optical power for trails. The U2000 provides a way to manage the optical
power that is related to the NE layout, topology structure and routing.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

The WDM trails must be correctly created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box displayed, set the filter criteria and click
Filter All. The trails are displayed in the list.
NOTE

l Click Filter All to refresh and display all the qualified trails.
l Click Secondary Filter to filter the trails that are already displayed.
l Click Incremental Filter to add the newly qualified trails to the list without refreshing the trails that
are already displayed.

Step 3 Right-click a trail and choose Query Relevant Optical Power from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the Optical Power Management window displayed, click the Table tab. Click Query to
query the optical power information of ports from the NE. In the Operation Result dialog box
displayed, click Close.
NOTE

In the View tab, move the cursor on a link. The U2000 shows the optical power information of all fibers
in the link.

Step 5 Click the Spectrum Analysis Info tab, and click Query. In the Operation Result dialog box
displayed, click Close.
NOTE

l If a trail traverses the multiplexer/demultiplexer card whose MON ports are connected to spectrum
analyzers, you can choose Spectrum Analyze > Source or Spectrum Analyze > Sink to switch to the
spectrum analysis window of the NE Explorer. In this window, you can view the details of the spectrum
analyzers. This function is available only when a spectrum analyzer exists.
l You can query the single-wavelength optical power about only optical-layer trails.
l By querying the single-wavelength optical power, you can clearly learn the single-wavelength optical
power of a trail in the U2000 user interface.
l Due to the factors, such as the split ratio and optical interface attenuation of the optical spectrum
analyzer card, the optical power value of each path after analysis has a fixed deviation from the actual
value. You can set Compensation Power(dBm) to keep consistency between the analysis value that
is displayed in the U2000 user interface and the actual value.

Step 6 Click the Graphic tab to query the graphic interface of the port optical power.

2-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

l Green indicates that the current optical power is in the normal range.
l Orange indicates that the current power exceeds the reference deviation and there is an exception.
l Black "E" shape in the histogram indicates the allowable deviation range of the optical power.

----End

2.1.8.8 Browsing Associated Working and Protection Trails


U2000 supports the function of displaying associated working and protection trails of an optical
NE on an optical layer trail. Through the function of querying a WDM trail, you can view the
other associated working and protection trails of a trail in the trail list.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

There must be created or searched WDM trails.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail, right click and select the Browse Associated Working/Protection Trails.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-51

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management


NOTE

If there are associated working and protection trails, they are displayed with the selected trail on the trail
management interface. If there are no associated working and protection trails, only the selected trail is displayed.

----End

2.1.8.9 Viewing the Fiber Information of a Trail


During service planning or fault location, you need to query or collect statistics on the
information about the fibers that a trail traverses. The U2000 provides the function of querying
information about the fibers that a trail occupies.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

The trail must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Right-click a trail and choose Browse Relevant Fibers from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the Fiber/Cable Management window, the list of the fibers that the trail traverses is displayed
for you to learn details.
NOTE

l The following is not supported: select a trail of the Group level to view the fibers that the trail traverses;
select multiple trails at the same time to view the fibers that the trails traverse.
l If a mono nodal trail does not traverse any fiber, no information is displayed in the corresponding
Fiber/Cable Management window.

----End

2.1.9 Maintaining WDM Trails


The end-to-end trails are carriers of services of the customers. In the routine maintenance, the
administrator and maintainer must find out the status of the trails to ensure that all the services
are transmitted correctly.
2.1.9.1 Activating/Deactivating WDM Trails
Deactivating WDM trails deletes the related services from the NE side and saves the relevant
data on the U2000 to release the occupied path resource. Activating trails enables the services
on the WDM trails according to the trail data that is saved on the U2000.
2.1.9.2 Querying Cross-Connection Information
The U2000 provides cross-connection information about trails higher than the OCh level. You
can view dynamic cross-connections of these trails and of their corresponding server trails.
2-52

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.1.9.3 Locking or Unlocking a WDM Trail


The U2000 can lock out some important trails. After lockout, you can only query the locked
WDM trails but not delete, activate, or rename them. Locking or unlocking a WDM trail does
not affect services that are running.
2.1.9.4 Querying the 1+1 Protection for a WDM Trail
This section describes how to query the 1+1 protection status for a WDM trail from the network
layer.
2.1.9.5 Performing 1+1 Protection Switching for a WDM Trail
You can perform 1+1 protection switching for a WDM trail.
2.1.9.6 Querying the WXCP/SNCP Protection of a WDM Trail
This section describes how to query the WXCP or SNCP protection state of a WDM trail from
the network layer.
2.1.9.7 Performing the WXCP/SNCP Protection Switching for a WDM Trail
The U2000 supports performing the WXCP or SNCP protection switching for the trails in the
end-to-end mode. Performing the WXCP or SNCP protection switching for the trails in the endto-end mode is more direct and easier than that on the per-NE basis.
2.1.9.8 Querying the DPPS Protection of a WDM Trail
This section describes how to query the DPPS protection state of a WDM trail from the network
layer.
2.1.9.9 Configuring OTU Overhead on the OCh Trail
You can use the U2000 to configure the overhead bytes of the trail node through the overhead
management function of the OTU layer that corresponds to the end-to-end OCh trail.
2.1.9.10 Modifying the Optical Power Adjustment Mode of a WDM Trail
In this user interface, you can modify the optical power adjustment modes for the optical crossconnection ports on the source and sink and intermediate NEs of a trail at a time.

2.1.9.1 Activating/Deactivating WDM Trails


Deactivating WDM trails deletes the related services from the NE side and saves the relevant
data on the U2000 to release the occupied path resource. Activating trails enables the services
on the WDM trails according to the trail data that is saved on the U2000.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The Client, ODUk, OTUk or OCh trail must be created.

Context

CAUTION
Deactivating WDM trails may interrupt the services.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-53

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Optional: Select one or more trails, right-click and choose Deactivate.
Step 4 Optional: Select one or more trails, right-click and choose Activate.
NOTE

If a certain server trail carries an active client trail or a partially active client trail, you need to deactivate
the client trail and then the server trail.

Step 5 Click OK in the Confirm window and the Reconfirm window displayed. A prompt appears
telling you that the operation was successful.
Step 6 Click Close.
----End

2.1.9.2 Querying Cross-Connection Information


The U2000 provides cross-connection information about trails higher than the OCh level. You
can view dynamic cross-connections of these trails and of their corresponding server trails.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

The trail must be higher than the OCh level. The OMS and OTS trails cannot be queried.

The cross-connection must be a dynamic cross-connection. A static cross-connection


cannot be queried.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail and click the Cross-Connection Information tab in the lower pane. The dynamic
cross-connections of the trail are displayed in a list.

2-54

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

l Select the Service layer check box. The dynamic cross-connections of the corresponding server trail
are also displayed in the list.
l In the case of a partly inactive trail, the activation state of its dynamic cross-connection can be
Active, Inactive, and Deleted.
l Active: indicates that the dynamic cross-connection is active.
l Inactive: indicates that the dynamic cross-connection is inactive.
l Deleted: indicates that the inactive dynamic cross-connection is deleted from an NE. Moreover,
trail search is not performed and the corresponding trail still exists on the NMS, but the dynamic
cross-connection is in the Deleted state.

----End

2.1.9.3 Locking or Unlocking a WDM Trail


The U2000 can lock out some important trails. After lockout, you can only query the locked
WDM trails but not delete, activate, or rename them. Locking or unlocking a WDM trail does
not affect services that are running.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network administrator" authority or higher.

The WDM trail must be created.

Context
NOTE

l After you lock out a trail, when you configure the trail on a per-NE basis, you cannot activate, deactivate,
delete, or modify the cross-connection used by the trail. In the WDM Trail Management window,
right-click a trail but some commands are grayed out in the shortcut menu. The commands are
Delete, Delete from Network Layer, Activate, Deactivate, and Name.
l If the locked trail exists at the client layer, you can create client trails on this trail.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Right-click a trail and choose Lock or Unlock from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.
----End

2.1.9.4 Querying the 1+1 Protection for a WDM Trail


This section describes how to query the 1+1 protection status for a WDM trail from the network
layer.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-55

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

The optical line protection or 1+1 protection groups must be configured.

Trail search must be performed properly.

Applies to Client, OCh, and OMS trails.

Context
You can query the status and parameters of inter-board 1+1 protection, intra board 1+1
protection, client-side 1+1 protection, optical line protection, 1+1 optical path protection, and
inter-subrack 1+1 protection for a trail.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 In the WDM Trail Management view, select a trail that is configured with the 1+1 protection.
Click Maintenance and choose WDM Trail 1+1 Parameter Settings from the drop-down
menu. The WDM Trail 1+1 Parameter Settings window is displayed. The 1+1 protection
information of the WDM trail is shown in the window.
Step 4 Select a protection group of WDM trails. Click Function and select Query Switching Status.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End

2.1.9.5 Performing 1+1 Protection Switching for a WDM Trail


You can perform 1+1 protection switching for a WDM trail.

Prerequisite

2-56

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The 1+1 protection status of the WDM trail is queried.

A trail search must be performed properly.

Applies to Client, OCh or OMS trails.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Context

CAUTION
l If you perform the forced switching when the protection channel is faulty, services are
interrupted.
l After you perform lockout of switching, manual switching, and forced switching
successfully, you need to clear these settings after the working channel returns to normal.
Otherwise, the switching cannot be performed automatically even when the currently active
channel is faulty. As a result, services are interrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a client trail that has WDM 1+1 protection, click Maintenance and select WDM Trail
1+1 Parameter Settings.
Step 4 Select a trail in the WDM Trail 1+1 Parameter Settings window. Right-click in the Current
Status field and choose Force to Working or any of the other switching operations. In the
Confirm dialog box, confirm the operation. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed,
indicating that the operation is successful.
NOTE

You need to confirm the operation only when performing the forced switching and trail locking.

Step 5 Click Close.


----End

2.1.9.6 Querying the WXCP/SNCP Protection of a WDM Trail


This section describes how to query the WXCP or SNCP protection state of a WDM trail from
the network layer.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

A trail with the WXCP or SNCP protection must be configured.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-57

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail with WXCP or SNCP in the WDM Trail Management window. Click the
Maintenance button and select WXCP/SNCP Service Control from the drop-down list. The
WXCP/SNCP Service Control window is displayed, indicating the WXCP or SNCP
information of the WDM trail.
Step 4 Select the protection group of this WDM trail and click Query.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End

2.1.9.7 Performing the WXCP/SNCP Protection Switching for a WDM Trail


The U2000 supports performing the WXCP or SNCP protection switching for the trails in the
end-to-end mode. Performing the WXCP or SNCP protection switching for the trails in the endto-end mode is more direct and easier than that on the per-NE basis.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

A trail with the WXCP or SNCP protection must be configured.

Context

CAUTION
l If you perform the forced switching when the protection channel is faulty, services are
interrupted.
l After you perform lockout of switching, manual switching, and forced switching
successfully, you need to clear these settings after the working channel returns to normal.
Otherwise, the switching cannot be performed automatically even when the currently active
channel is faulty. As a result, services are interrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l
2-58

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 In the WDM Trail Management view, select a trail with the WXCP or SNCP protection. Click
Maintenance and select WXCP/SNCP Service Control from the drop-down list. The WXCP/
SNCP Service Control window is displayed, indicating the WXCP or SNCP information of the
WDM trail.
Step 4 Select the protection group of this WDM trail. Click Function and select the forced or manual
switching from the drop-down list.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End

2.1.9.8 Querying the DPPS Protection of a WDM Trail


This section describes how to query the DPPS protection state of a WDM trail from the network
layer.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

A trail with the DPPS protection must be configured.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail with DPPS in the WDM Trail Management window. Click the Maintenance
button and select DPPS Query from the drop-down list. The DPPS Protection window is
displayed, indicating the DPPS information of the WDM trail.
Step 4 Select the protection group of this WDM trail and click Query, the DPPS information of the
WDM trail is displayed.
----End

2.1.9.9 Configuring OTU Overhead on the OCh Trail


You can use the U2000 to configure the overhead bytes of the trail node through the overhead
management function of the OTU layer that corresponds to the end-to-end OCh trail.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-59

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The OCh trail must be searched, and the source and sink OTU boards must support overhead
management.

Context

CAUTION
You need to configure OTU overheads correctly. Otherwise, services may be interrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select an OCh trail, click Maintenance, and select Overhead Management. The OTU
Overhead window is displayed.
Step 4 Select a port from the object list. Right-click on the TTI to be Received or TTI to be Sent
column. Select the overhead bytes input mode.

2-60

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

l Choose Copy All Form Received to automatically copy the contents of current overhead bytes received
to the table.
l Choose Manual Input to customize the contents of the overhead bytes.
l The value of TTI Received must be the same as the value of TTI to be Received. Otherwise, the
OTUk_TIM alarm is reported.

Option

Description

Copy All Form Received Choose Copy All Form Received.


Manual Input

Choose Manual Input. The Please input the overhead byte


dialog box is displayed. Enter the information about SAPI,
DAPI and Operator Specific. Click OK.
NOTE
l Source Flag and Sink Flag can contain up to 15 characters. User
Tag can contain up to 32 characters.
l When the Use the identifiers for the source and sink information
check box is selected, by default, the U2000 sets SAPI, DAPI, and
Operator Specific according to the source and sink information.

Step 5 Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.


Step 6 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Step 7 Click Close.
----End

2.1.9.10 Modifying the Optical Power Adjustment Mode of a WDM Trail


In this user interface, you can modify the optical power adjustment modes for the optical crossconnection ports on the source and sink and intermediate NEs of a trail at a time.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The OCh trail with the dynamic cross-connection must exist.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select an OCh trail, click Maintenance, and select Set Optical Power Adjustment Mode from
the drop-down list. The Set Optical Power Adjustment Mode dialog box is displayed.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-61

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 4 Select the port to be adjusted, right-click, and select Auto or Manual as required.
NOTE

When Adjustment Mode Status is set to Auto or Manual, you can modify the optical power adjustment
mode. Adjustment Mode Status has four values as follows: Manual, Auto, Inconsistent, and -.
l Manual: In this mode, you need to manually adjust the optical power of each optical cross-connection
port.
l Auto: In this mode, the optical power is automatically adjusted for each optical cross-connection port.
l Inconsistent: The optical cross-connection ports of a trail use different optical power adjustment
modes.
l -: The trail does not support the function of setting the optical power adjustment mode, because no
optical cross-connections exists on the trail or only static cross-connections exist on the trail.

Step 5 In the Operation Result dialog box, click OK.


----End

2.1.10 Modifying WDM Trails


Due to service requirements, sometimes, you need to modify the configuration of a WDM trail.
U2000 supports manually modifying the source and sink of an exisiting WDM trail and the trail
names in batches, instead of creating WDM trails. This greatly simplifies the operations.
2.1.10.1 Changing the Source, Sink, and Route of a WDM Trail
This topic describes how to change the source, sink, and route of a WDM trail because of service
requirements. The U2000 supports the ability to change a WDM trail manually without creating
a new WDM trail. This greatly simplifies the operations.
2.1.10.2 Modifying Trail Names in Batches
The network administrator can set the trail naming rules and modify trail names in batches
according to these rules.
2.1.10.3 Changing the Route of a Platinum Service
You can modify the trails that do not fully comply with the requirements of the platinum service
in the downgraded platinum service group. Therefore, the fully-compliant platinum service
group is created.
2.1.10.4 Removing a Trail from a Platinum Service Group
When the platinum service protection is no longer required but the trail of the platinum service
protection needs to be retained, you can remove the trail from the platinum service group.

2.1.10.1 Changing the Source, Sink, and Route of a WDM Trail


This topic describes how to change the source, sink, and route of a WDM trail because of service
requirements. The U2000 supports the ability to change a WDM trail manually without creating
a new WDM trail. This greatly simplifies the operations.

Prerequisite

2-62

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The trail must be unlocked.

The trail must be an active Client or ODUk trail.

The trail must have only one source and one sink, and must have idle resources.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Context
The configuration principles are as follows:
l

The OTU boards at the source and sink ends, such as the L4G, LOG, and LQG boards,
must support configuring cross-connections and must be installed on different NEs.

The source and sink of a trail represent specific service ports.

The U2000 does not support the ability to modify a cross-subrack WDM trail. If you want
to modify the sink end of a WDM trail, the sink end before modification and the sink end
after modification must reside in the same subrack.

CAUTION
l Modifying the source or sink of a trail interrupts services.
l Deleting the protection route of a trail makes services unprotected.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select the required Client trail or ODUk trail from the list, and click Create/Modify > Modify
Trail in the lower part of the list. The Modify WDM Trail window is displayed.
Step 4 Optional: Change the source or sink of the trail. The ports before and after modification must
belong to the same NE.
1.

Click Browse corresponding to Source to select a source port.

2.

Click Browse corresponding to Sink to select a sink port.

Step 5 Optional: Change the intermediate route of the trail.


1.

Click the Trail Setting tab. Change the explicit link, explicit node and excluded node in
the Route Constraint area.

2.

Click Specify Route Channel. The Specify Route Channel dialog box is displayed.

3.

Select new Server Layer Trail Name, Server Layer Trail, and Channel as required, and
click OK.

Step 6 Optional: Change the protection route of the trail.


1.

Click the Protection Setting tab.

2.

Delete a protection route. To be specific, select the required route from the Route
Information list, and click Delete Protection.

1.

Add a protection route. To be specific, right-click Node List and then choose Add from
the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the SNCP protection route.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-63

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.

Click Protection Setting. The Specify Route Channel dialog box is displayed.

3.

Select Server Layer Trail Name, Server Layer Trail, and Channel of the protection
route as required, and click OK.

Step 7 Click Finish, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, click Yes.
Step 8 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
----End

Result
1.

Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu and select
the proper filter criteria for the trails.
TIP

You can filter other trails according to the source and sink of the new trail.

2.

In the WDM Trail Management user interface, find out that the trail is correctly modified.

2.1.10.2 Modifying Trail Names in Batches


The network administrator can set the trail naming rules and modify trail names in batches
according to these rules.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The trail naming rules must be set on the U2000.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria and click Filter All.
The trails are displayed in the list.
NOTE

l Click Filter All to refresh and display all the qualified trails.
l Click Secondary Filter to filter the trails that are already displayed.
l Click Incremental Filter to add newly qualified trails to the list without refreshing the trails that are
already displayed.

Step 3 Right-click one or more trails from the list, and choose Name from the shortcut menu. For the
naming rules, refer to Customizing Naming Rule.
Step 4 In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click OK.
----End

2.1.10.3 Changing the Route of a Platinum Service


You can modify the trails that do not fully comply with the requirements of the platinum service
in the downgraded platinum service group. Therefore, the fully-compliant platinum service
group is created.
2-64

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The trail is not locked.

Context
The procedures of modifying a trail in a platinum service group are almost the same as the
procedures of modifying a non-platinum service, that is normal service. The differences are
described as follows:
l

When a trail in the platinum service group is modified, the U2000 automatically considers
other trails in the platinum service group as reference trails. Therefore, when calculating
the route, the U2000 automatically filters out the available resources of the fibers in the
fiber/cable pipe that the reference trails pass through.

When the trail in the platinum service group is modified, the U2000 checks whether the
trails in the platinum service group meet the requirements of the platinum service.

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the trail in the platinum service group according to the procedures of modifying the nonplatinum service. For details, see 2.1.10.1 Changing the Source, Sink, and Route of a WDM
Trail.
----End

2.1.10.4 Removing a Trail from a Platinum Service Group


When the platinum service protection is no longer required but the trail of the platinum service
protection needs to be retained, you can remove the trail from the platinum service group.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The U2000 license that is used must support platinum services.

The platinum service group must be created.

Context
If certain trails in a platinum service group are deleted or removed, the U2000 checks whether
the remaining trails in the platinum service group meet the requirement.

Procedure
Step 1 Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box displayed, set the filter criteria and click
Filter All. The trails are displayed in the list.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-65

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management


NOTE

l Click Filter All to refresh and display all the qualified trails.
l Click Secondary Filter to filter the trails that are already displayed.
l Click Incremental Filter to add the newly qualified trails to the list without refreshing the trails that
are already displayed.

Step 3 Right-click the trail that you want to remove from the platinum service group and then choose
Move Out of Platinum Service Group from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
----End

2.1.11 Deleting a WDM Trail


The operation deletes the WDM trails from the network layer or from the NE layer. You need
to delete the trails if the network will be adjusted or rebuilt.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The trail is not the OTS trail.

The trail must have the highest priority.

The trails that contain dynamic cross-connections must be deactivated before deleted. Other
trails can be directly deleted.

Context
A WDM trail can be deleted from the network side or the NE side.
l

If a trail is deleted from the network side, only the WDM trail at the network layer is deleted
on the U2000 side. The deleted trail is not delivered to the NE. Moreover, the service is
not affected. Generally, this method is adopted to synchronize the trail information on the
U2000 side and the trail information at the network layer. After the trail is deleted from the
network layer, you can search for and find it again based on the service information at the
NE layer.

If a trail is deleted at the NE layer, the trail on the NE side is deleted accordingly. After the
trail is deleted, the service is interrupted. If the service configuration of the trail is incorrect
or needs to be modified, you can delete the trail at the NE layer and then create another
trail.

The U2000 supports the ability to delete a WDM trail and to delete a dynamic crossconnection related to the trail.

The U2000 does not support the ability to delete the WDM trail that has a client trail.

The U2000 does not support the ability to delete an OTS trail.

Before you delete a WDM trail, the dynamic cross-connection related to the trail must be
inactive. If active, an error is displayed during the deletion.

CAUTION
Deleting the trails from NE layer will affect service.

2-66

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Optional: Deleting WDM Trails from the NE Layer.


1.

Select the WDM trail that you want to delete, right-click it and choose Delete.

2.

In the Confirm and Reconfirm dialog boxes displayed, click OK. The operation is
complete.

Step 4 Optional: Deleting WDM Trails from the Network Layer.


1.

Select the WDM trail that you want to delete, right-click it and choose Delete from
Network Layer.

2.

In the Operation Result dialog boxes displayed, click Close.

----End

2.1.12 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the


OptiX BWS 1600G by Using a traditional method
This sample describes how to configure GE Services with the WXCP protection in the end-toend mode.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The Optical NE must be created as shown in Figure 2-16.

The NEs and boards must be created as shown in NE Panel.

Context
Network Design
The Project T constructs a ring network with station A, station B, station C and station D. All
the equipments are OptiX Metro 6100V1E. Station A is an Optical Terminal Multiplexer (OTM)
station. The station A has two back-to-back OTMs including two NEs. Station B, station C and
station D are Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer (OADM) stations. Each station has one NEs. The
network design is shown in Figure 2-16.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-67

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-16 Network Design

OADM
OTM

Slot Diagram
Figure 2-17 Station A

2-68

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-18 Station B

Figure 2-19 Station C

Figure 2-20 Station D

Service Requirements
In the network management center, the maintenance engineer is responsible for the service
deployment and adjustment. Suppose that the engineer is familiar with all the services carried
by the WDM network. One of the routine tasks of this engineer is to deploy the GE level service
to a wavelength. After receiving a request, the engineer must follow the request to configure a
GE level service with WXCP from station A to station C.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-69

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Procedure
1.

Query the available resources of the WDM side.

2.

Search for WDM trails.

3.

Create a GE trail with the WXCP protection.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the available resources of the WDM side.
1.

Choose Inventory > WDM Statistic Report > Statistics Report of WDM Client-Side
Port Resources from the Main Menu.

2.

Select the optical NE A and the optical NE C from the Navigation Tree. Click the double
arrow button to add the port resources of the two NEs to the statistics area at the right-hand
side.

3.

Click Used Port and Unused Port to view the using status of each port.

4.

Record all the available resources.

Step 2 Search for WDM trails.


1.

Connect fibers on the U2000 according to the actual networking diagram.

2.

Choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

3.

Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.

4.

Click Next to begin to search for trails. The U2000 takes some time to return the results,
depending on the number of services.

5.

Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. Select the trail to set the trail
management flag.
NOTE

If no trails conflict, no window about conflicting trails is displayed. After you click Next, the
U2000 displays the window about discrete services.

2-70

6.

Click Next to view all discrete services in the target network.

7.

After the search is complete, click Finish.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 3 Create a GE trail with the WXCP protection.


1.

Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.

2.

Set the level, rate and direction of the service.


Set the service level as GE, and set the service direction as Unidirectional.

3.

Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog
box, select the NE, card, and port.
Set the source port as No.3 port of the No.1 timeslot LQG on NE331.
Set the sink port as No.3 port of the No.1 timeslot LQG on NE333.

4.

Click the Protection Setting tab, and set the SNCP protection route. Right-click the NE
that dual feeds services and choose Set Dual-Feed Point from the shortcut menu. In the
upper left corner of the NE icon, is displayed. Right-click the NE that selectively receives
services and choose Set Selective-Receiving Point from the shortcut menu. In the upper
left corner of the NE icon,

is displayed.

Set optical NE A as the dual transmitting node and optical NE C as the receiving node.
5.

Click the General Attributes, set the basic trail attributes, including the name and ID.

6.

Select the Activate check box.

7.

Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.

----End

2.1.13 Sample Application: Configuring an OCh Trail


This section describes how to configure an OCh trail in the end-to-end mode.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The optical NE as shown in Figure 2-21 must be created.

The NEs and boards as shown in NE Panel must be created.

Context
Project network design
Project T is a ring network that consists of stations A, B, C, and D. The network uses the OptiX
Metro 6100 equipment. Stations A, B, C, and D are optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
stations. Each station has only one NE. Figure 2-21 shows the network design, and Table 2-3
lists the network configuration data.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-71

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-21 Network design

OADM

Table 2-3 Network data table


Station

NE Type

NE Name

IP Address

Remarks

OADM

NE403

129.9.1.174

Gateway NE

OADM

NE430

129.9.1.145

Non-gateway
NE

OADM

NE401

129.9.1.146

Non-gateway
NE

OADM

NE402

129.9.1.147

Non-gateway
NE

NE Panel
In the project, the configurations for NEs on stations A, B, C, and D are the same.

2-72

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-22 NE panel on station A

F S SF W W P
I C CI S S M
U 2 CU D M U
9 9

LL
44
GG

Service demand
A main responsibility of the transmission equipment maintenance engineers in the transmission
maintenance department of the network management center is to provision and groom services
in the WDM network. An engineer receives a grooming order for provisioning two services.
One is a unidirectional service from station B to station C. The other is a bidirectional service
from station B to station D. Based on the services, the planned OCh trails are as follows:
l

There is a unidirectional trail from station B to station C. The route is B->C. The wavelength
of the service is wavelength 1. Figure 2-23 shows the trail signal flow.

Figure 2-23 Signal flow of the trail from station B to station C

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

There is a bidirectional trail from station B to station D. The route from station B to station
D is B->C->D. This route passes through station C. The wavelength of the service is
wavelength 2. The route from station D to station B is D->A->B. This route passes through
station A. The wavelength of the service is wavelength 2. Figure 2-24 and Figure 2-25
show the trail signal flows.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-73

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-24 Signal flow of the trail from station B to station D

Figure 2-25 Signal flow of the trail from station D to station B

Configuration procedure
1.

Search for WDM server trails.

2.

Create an OCh trail from station B to station C.

3.

Create an OCh trail between station B and station D.

Procedure
Step 1 Search for WDM server trails.

2-74

1.

Connect fibers on the U2000 according to the actual networking and signal flow diagrams.

2.

Choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

3.

Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

4.

Click Next to begin to search for trails. The U2000 takes some time to return the results,
depending on the number of services.

5.

Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. Select the trail to set the trail
management flag.
NOTE

If no conflict trail exists, the window of conflict trails is not displayed. Click Next. The U2000
displays a window that displays discrete services.

6.

Click Next to view all discrete services in the target network.

7.

After the search is complete, click Finish.

Step 2 Create an OCh trail from station B to station C.


1.

Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.

2.

Set the level and direction of the service.


Set the service level to OCh, and set the service direction to Unidirectional.

3.

Click Browse and the Select Board Port-Source/Sink dialog box is displayed. Select the
NE, board, port and wavelength.
Set the source port to port 1 of the L4G in slot 1 on NE430 and the sink port to port 1 of
the L4G in slot 1 on NE401.

4.

Click the General Attributes, set the basic trail attributes, including the name and ID.

5.

Select the Activate check box.

6.

Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.

Step 3 Create an OCh trail between station B and station D.


1.

Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.

2.

Set the level, rate and direction of the service.


Set the service level to OCh, and set the service direction to Bidirectional.

3.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog
box, select the NE, card, and port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-75

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Set the source port to port 1 of the L4G in slot 2 on NE430 and the sink port to port 1 of
the L4G in slot 2 on NE402.
4.

Click the General Attributes, set the basic trail attributes, including the name and ID.

5.

Select the Activate check box.

6.

Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.

----End

2.1.14 Application Example: Configuring an OCh Trail with OLP


Protection by Using the End-To-End Trail Management Function
(OptiX OSN 6800)
This topic describes how to configure an OCh trail with the optical line protection (OLP) on the
OptiX OSN 6800.
2.1.14.1 Configuration Networking Diagram
This topic describes how to configure an OCh trail with the optical line protection (OLP) on the
OptiX OSN 6800. This configuration example adopts a link network.
2.1.14.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning
This topic describes how to configure the signal flow of an OCh trail and how to plan parameters
for the trail.
2.1.14.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to create an OCh trail with the OLP protection.

2.1.14.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This topic describes how to configure an OCh trail with the optical line protection (OLP) on the
OptiX OSN 6800. This configuration example adopts a link network.

Service Requirements
Figure 2-26 shows a link network that consists of two optical NEs, that is, NE1 and NE2. Each
NE is an OTM station. The service requirements are as follows:
User 1 can communicate with User 2 and a bidirectional OCh trail with the OLP protection exists
between NE1 and NE2.

2-76

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-26 Configuration networking diagram of an OCh trail

Card Configuration
In this example, one NS2 card and one OLP card are configured on both NE1 and NE2.
Figure 2-27 Card configuration

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-77

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.1.14.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning


This topic describes how to configure the signal flow of an OCh trail and how to plan parameters
for the trail.

Service Signal Flow


A bidirectional OCh trail with optical line protection (OLP) exists between NE1 and NE2.
Figure 2-28 shows the signal flow between NE1 and NE2. Figure 2-29 shows the intra-station
signal flow of NE1 and NE4.
Figure 2-28 Signal flow of an OCh trail

Figure 2-29 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE2

2-78

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Parameter Planning
OMS server trails need to be created before you create an OCh trail. Therefore, search for trails
before creating an OCh trail to ensure that the required OMS server trails exist.
NOTE

When creating OCh trails, ensure that the wavelength of an OTU card matches the wavelength of a
connected multiplexer or demultiplexer card.
l

In the case of a static multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as M40 and MR2, the wavelength of
the OTU card must be the same as the wavelength of the port on the multiplexer or demultiplexer
card that is connected to the OTU card.

In the case of a dynamic multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as WMS9 and RMU9, the
wavelength of the OTU card must match the band of the multiplexer or demultiplexer card that is
connected to the OTU card.

In the preceding example, cards WSM9 and WSD9 belong to even bands. Therefore, you need to
select even wavelengths for the wavelength of the NE2 card.

Table 2-4 Parameter planning for an OCh trail


Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail

Bidirectional

NE1-shelf0-2NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf0-2NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

2.1.14.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to create an OCh trail with the OLP protection.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Search for WDM trails. For details, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM Trails.
NOTE

After the search, you will find that an OMS trail exists between the source and sink NEs where the OCh
trail is created. If not, the OCh trail cannot be created.

Step 2 Create the OCh trail. For details, see 2.1.4.1 Creating an OCh Trail.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-79

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management


NOTE

l In the case of an OCh trail without dynamic cross-connections, that is, with pure static crossconnections, you need not create such an OCh trail manually. Such an OCh trail can be searched out
directly after a trail search.
l If the source card and sink card of the OCh trail are cards such as L2DGD and L2QMD that can be
used for intra-card 1+1 protection, you must perform the trail search to search for OTUk trails after
the OCh trail is created. Otherwise, the cross-layer creation of a Client trail is affected. Specifically,
the created Client trail is inconsistent with the Client trail searched out after the trail search.

Table 2-5 Parameter planning for an OCh trail


Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail

Bidirectional

NE1-shelf0-2NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf0-2NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

----End

Result
If you select Bidirectional when creating a trail, one unidirectional trail group is displayed in
the WDM Trail Management window after the creation.

2.1.15 Application Example: Configuring an ODUk Trail by Using


the Cross-Layer Creation Function (OptiX OSN 6800)
This topic describes how to configure an ODUk trail with the subnetwork connection protection
(SNCP) on the OptiX OSN 6800.
2.1.15.1 Configuration Networking Diagram
This topic describes how to configure an ODUk trail with the subnetwork connection protection
(SNCP) on the OptiX OSN 6800. This configuration example adopts a ring network.
2.1.15.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning
This topic describes how to configure the signal flow of an ODUk trail and how to plan
parameters for the trail.
2.1.15.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to create an ODU1 trails with the SNCP protection.

2.1.15.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This topic describes how to configure an ODUk trail with the subnetwork connection protection
(SNCP) on the OptiX OSN 6800. This configuration example adopts a ring network.

Service Requirements
Figure 2-30 shows a ring network that consists of four optical NEs, that is, NE1, NE2, NE3,
and NE4. Each NE is an OADM station. The service requirements are as follows:
2-80

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

User 1 can communicate with User 2 and a bidirectional ODUk trail with the SNCP protection
exists between NE1 and NE2.
Figure 2-30 Configuration networking diagram of an ODUk trail

Card Configuration
In this example, two NS2 cards and one TDG card are configured on both NE1 and NE2.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-81

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-31 Card configuration

2.1.15.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning


This topic describes how to configure the signal flow of an ODUk trail and how to plan
parameters for the trail.

Service Signal Flow


A bidirectional ODUk trail with the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) exists between
NE1 and NE4. The working route is NE1->NE4 and the protection route is NE1->NE2->NE3>NE4.
Figure 2-32 shows the signal flow from NE1 to NE4. Figure 2-33 shows the intra-station signal
flow of NE1 and NE4.

2-82

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-32 Signal flow of an ODUk trail

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-83

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Figure 2-33 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE4

Figure 2-34 Intra-station signal flow of NE2 and NE3

2-84

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Parameter Planning
Server trails need to be created before you create an ODU1 trail. In the network provided in the
example, the server trails include OMS, OCh, ODUk, and OTUk trails. Among them, the OMS
trail can be searched out directly and need not be created manually. Since the U2000 supports
the cross-layer creation of trails, an ODU1 trail can be created on an OCh trail directly. Therefore,
you need to create an OCh trail before creating an ODU1 trail.
Since the ODU1 trail is a dual fed and selective receiving service, a working route and a
protection route exist for the trail. Therefore, in addition to the creation of the ODU1 trail, you
need to create server trails for its working route and protection route, that is, OCh-trail-1 and
OCh-trail-2.
NOTE

The ODU1 service has the working route, NE1->NE4, and the protection route, NE1->NE2->NE3->NE4.
l

The working route traverses the OCh trail OCh-trail-1.

The protection route traverses the OCh trail OCh-trail-2.

When creating OCh trails, ensure that the wavelength of an OTU card matches the wavelength of a
connected multiplexer or demultiplexer card.
l

In the case of a static multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as M40 and MR2, the wavelength of
the OTU card must be the same as the wavelength of the port on the multiplexer or demultiplexer
card that is connected to the OTU card.

In the case of a dynamic multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as WMS9 and RMU9, the
wavelength of the OTU card must match the band of the multiplexer or demultiplexer card that is
connected to the OTU card.

In the preceding example, cards WSM9 and WSD9 belong to even bands. Therefore, you need to
select even wavelengths for the wavelength of the NE2 card.

Table 2-6 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail-1

Bidirectional

NE1-shelf0-16NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf0-2NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

OCh-trail-2

Bidirectional

NE1-shelf0-2NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf0-16NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-85

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Table 2-7 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail


Name

Direction

Source
NEShelfSlotCardPortChannel

Sink NEShelfSlotCardPortChannel

Dual
Fed/
Selective
Receivin
g NE

Server
Link for
the
Working
Route

Server
Link for
the
Protectio
n Route

ODU1trail

Bidirectio
nal

NE1shelf0-1TDG-201
(LP)-1

NE4shelf0-1TDG-201
(LP)-1

NE1, NE4

OChtrail-1

OChtrail-2

2.1.15.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to create an ODU1 trails with the SNCP protection.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Search for OMS trails. For details, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM Trails.
Step 2 Create two bidirectional OCh trails. For details, see 2.1.4.1 Creating an OCh Trail.
NOTE

l In the case of an OCh trail without dynamic cross-connections, that is, with pure static crossconnections, you need not create such an OCh trail manually. Such an OCh trail can be searched out
directly after a trail search.
l If the source card and sink card of the OCh trail are cards such as L2DGD and L2QMD that can be
used for intra-card 1+1 protection, you must perform the trail search to search for OTUk trails after
the OCh trail is created. Otherwise, the cross-layer creation of a Client trail is affected. Specifically,
the created Client trail is inconsistent with the Client trail searched out after the trail search.

Table 2-8 Parameter planning for an OCh trail


Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail-1

Bidirectional

NE1-shelf0-16NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf0-2NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

OCh-trail-2

Bidirectional

NE1-shelf0-2NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf0-16NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

Step 3 Create a bidirectional ODU1 trail. For details, see 2.1.4.2 Creating an ODUk Trail.
2-86

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Table 2-9 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail


Name

Direction

Source
NEShelfSlotCardPortChannel

Sink NEShelfSlotCardPortChannel

Dual
Fed/
Selective
Receivin
g NE

Server
Link for
the
Working
Route

Server
Link for
the
Protectio
n Route

ODU1trail

Bidirectio
nal

NE1shelf0-1TDG-201
(LP)-1

NE4shelf0-1TDG-201
(LP)-1

NE1, NE4

OChtrail-1

OChtrail-2

----End

Result
If you select Bidirectional when creating a trail, one unidirectional trail group is displayed in
the WDM Trail Management window after the creation.

2.1.16 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the


OptiX BWS 1600G by Using a traditional method
This sample describes how to configure GE Services with the WXCP protection in the end-toend mode.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The Optical NE must be created as shown in Figure 2-35.

The NEs and boards must be created as shown in NE Panel.

Context
Network Design
The Project T constructs a ring network with station A, station B, station C and station D. All
the equipments are OptiX Metro 6100V1E. Station A is an Optical Terminal Multiplexer (OTM)
station. The station A has two back-to-back OTMs including two NEs. Station B, station C and
station D are Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer (OADM) stations. Each station has one NEs. The
network design is shown in Figure 2-35.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-87

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-35 Network Design

OADM
OTM

Slot Diagram
Figure 2-36 Station A

2-88

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-37 Station B

Figure 2-38 Station C

Figure 2-39 Station D

Service Requirements
In the network management center, the maintenance engineer is responsible for the service
deployment and adjustment. Suppose that the engineer is familiar with all the services carried
by the WDM network. One of the routine tasks of this engineer is to deploy the GE level service
to a wavelength. After receiving a request, the engineer must follow the request to configure a
GE level service with WXCP from station A to station C.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-89

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Procedure
1.

Query the available resources of the WDM side.

2.

Search for WDM trails.

3.

Create a GE trail with the WXCP protection.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the available resources of the WDM side.
1.

Choose Inventory > WDM Statistic Report > Statistics Report of WDM Client-Side
Port Resources from the Main Menu.

2.

Select the optical NE A and the optical NE C from the Navigation Tree. Click the double
arrow button to add the port resources of the two NEs to the statistics area at the right-hand
side.

3.

Click Used Port and Unused Port to view the using status of each port.

4.

Record all the available resources.

Step 2 Search for WDM trails.


1.

Connect fibers on the U2000 according to the actual networking diagram.

2.

Choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

3.

Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.

4.

Click Next to begin to search for trails. The U2000 takes some time to return the results,
depending on the number of services.

5.

Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. Select the trail to set the trail
management flag.
NOTE

If no trails conflict, no window about conflicting trails is displayed. After you click Next, the
U2000 displays the window about discrete services.

2-90

6.

Click Next to view all discrete services in the target network.

7.

After the search is complete, click Finish.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 3 Create a GE trail with the WXCP protection.


1.

Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.

2.

Set the level, rate and direction of the service.


Set the service level as GE, and set the service direction as Unidirectional.

3.

Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog
box, select the NE, card, and port.
Set the source port as No.3 port of the No.1 timeslot LQG on NE331.
Set the sink port as No.3 port of the No.1 timeslot LQG on NE333.

4.

Click the Protection Setting tab, and set the SNCP protection route. Right-click the NE
that dual feeds services and choose Set Dual-Feed Point from the shortcut menu. In the
upper left corner of the NE icon, is displayed. Right-click the NE that selectively receives
services and choose Set Selective-Receiving Point from the shortcut menu. In the upper
left corner of the NE icon,

is displayed.

Set optical NE A as the dual transmitting node and optical NE C as the receiving node.
5.

Click the General Attributes, set the basic trail attributes, including the name and ID.

6.

Select the Activate check box.

7.

Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.

----End

2.1.17 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the


OptiX OSN 6800 by Using a traditional method
This configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure a
GE service with the SNCP protection.
2.1.17.1 Networking Configuration
This configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure a
GE service on a ring network.
2.1.17.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning
This topic describes how to configure the GE service signal flow and how to plan parameters
for each trail.
2.1.17.3 Configuration Process
This configuration example illustrates how to configure a GE service with the SNCP protection
with the traditional method. In addition, the example provides details about the process for
configuring a GE service. Specifically, you need to configure the server trails of a GE service
layer by layer before creating the GE service.

2.1.17.1 Networking Configuration


This configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure a
GE service on a ring network.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-91

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Service Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-40, four optical NEs, which are NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4, consist of a
ring network. Each site is an OADM site. In this case, the service requirements are as follows:
To enable communication between User 1 and User 2, a bidirectional GE service with the SNCP
protection is required between NE1 and NE4.
Figure 2-40 Networking configuration for a GE service

Card Configuration
In this example, one 52TOM card and two 52NS2 cards are configured on both NE1 and NE4
and two 52NS2 cards are configured on both NE2 and NE3.
Figure 2-41 Card configuration

2-92

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.1.17.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning


This topic describes how to configure the GE service signal flow and how to plan parameters
for each trail.

Service Signal Flow


A bidirectional GE service with the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) exists between
NE1 and NE4. The working route is NE1->NE4 and the protection route is NE1->NE2->NE3>NE4.
Figure 2-42 shows the signal flow between NE1 and NE4. Figure 2-43 shows the intra-station
signal flow of NE1 and NE4.
Figure 2-42 GE service signal flow

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-93

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Figure 2-43 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE4

Parameter Planning
If you create a GE service with the traditional method, you also need to create the server trails
for the service. In the network provided in the example, the server trails include OMS, OCh,
ODU2, and ODU1 trails. Among them, the OMS trails can be searched out directly and need
not be created manually. After you create an OCh trail, you can search out the OTUk trail by
the trail search.
Since the GE service is a dual fed and selective receiving service, a working route and a protection
route exist for the service. Therefore, in addition to the creation of the GE service, you also need
to create server trails for the working route and protection route. In the tables below, trail-1
represents the server trail of the working route and trail-2, trail-3, trail-4 represents the server
trail of the protection route.
NOTE

The GE service has both the working route that is NE1->NE4 and the protection route that is NE1->NE2>NE3->NE4.
l The working route traverses the following OCh trail: OCh-trail-1.
l The protection route traverses the following OCh trails: OCh-trail-2 (that is, NE1->NE2), OCh-trail-3
(that is, NE2->NE3), and OCh-trail-4 (that is, NE3->NE4).
When creating OCh trails, ensure that the wavelength of an OTU card matches the wavelength of a
connected multiplexer or demultiplexer card.

2-94

In the case of a static multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as M40 and MR2, the wavelength of
the OTU card must be the same as the wavelength of the port on the multiplexer or demultiplexer
card that is connected to the OTU card.

In the case of a dynamic multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as WMS9 and RMU9, the
wavelength of the OTU card must match the band of the multiplexer or demultiplexer card that is
connected to the OTU card.

In the preceding example, cards WSM9 and WSD9 belong to even bands. Therefore, you need to
select even wavelengths for the wavelength of the NE2 card.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Table 2-10 Parameter planning for an OCh trail


Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail-1

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

NE4shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

OCh-trail-2

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

NE2shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

OCh-trail-3

Bidirectional

NE2shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

NE3shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

OCh-trail-4

Bidirectional

NE3shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

NE4shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

Table 2-11 Parameter planning for an ODU2 trail


Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-CardSlot-PortChannel

Sink NEShelf-CardSlot-PortChannel

Server Link

ODU2-trail-1

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-5-52NS2
-51
(ODU1LP)-1

NE4shelf3-11-52NS
2-51
(ODU1LP)-1

OCh-trail-1

ODU2-trail-2

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-11-52NS
2-51
(ODU1LP)-1

NE4shelf3-5-52NS2
-51
(ODU1LP)-1

OCh-trail-2,
OCh-trail-3,
OCh-trail-4

Table 2-12 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-CardSlot-PortChannel

Sink NEShelf-CardSlot-PortChannel

Server Link

ODU1-trail-1

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-1-52TO
M-201
(ClientLP1)-1

NE4shelf3-1-52TO
M-201
(ClientLP1)-1

ODU2-trail-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-95

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-CardSlot-PortChannel

Sink NEShelf-CardSlot-PortChannel

Server Link

ODU1-trail-2

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-1-52TO
M-203
(ClientLP3)-1

NE4shelf3-1-52TO
M-203
(ClientLP3)-1

ODU2-trail-2

Table 2-13 Parameter planning for a GE service


Name

Level

Directi
on

Source
NEShelfSlotCardPort

Sink
NEShelfSlotCardPort

Dual
Fed/
Selectiv
e
Receivi
ng NE

Server
Link for
the
Workin
g Route

Server
Link for
the
Protecti
on
Route

GEtrail-1

Client

Bidirecti
onal

NE1shelf3-152TOM3(RX/
TX)

NE4shelf3-152TOM3(RX/
TX)

NE1,
NE4

ODU1trail-1

ODU1trail-2

2.1.17.3 Configuration Process


This configuration example illustrates how to configure a GE service with the SNCP protection
with the traditional method. In addition, the example provides details about the process for
configuring a GE service. Specifically, you need to configure the server trails of a GE service
layer by layer before creating the GE service.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Context
NOTE

l The 52TOM card can be applied to twelve scenarios. In this application, Non-Cascading ODU1
tributary mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) mode is used. For information on other scenarios, navigate
through topics 2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board in the Help.
l The total speed of services at each group of ClientLP ports cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.
l For a GE service, each group of ClientLP ports can support one signal at most.

2-96

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

l In this application, the client-side logical ports inside the 52TOM card is divided into four groups:
ClientLP1 and ClientLP2, ClientLP3 and ClientLP4, ClientLP5 and ClientLP6, together with
ClientLP7 and ClientLP8. Ports in the same group cannot be used at the same time. For example, if
you configure a cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, you cannot configure
another cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1. The same restriction applies
to ports of other groups.
l The total speed of services at eight pairs of client-side optical ports cannot be higher than 10 Gbit/s.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the working mode of the 52TOM cards on NE1 and NE4 where GE services are added or
dropped.
Type

Name

Working Mode

Configuration
Method

Card

52TOM

Non-Cascading

Port

ClientLP1,
ClientLP3

ODU1 tributary
mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1)

For details, see


2.6.1.3 Configuring
the Working Mode
of the 52TOM
Board.

Step 2 Set the service type and service mode of the WDM interface on the 52TOM card.
Card-Optical PortChannel

Service Type

Service Mode

Configuration
Method

52TOM-3(RX1/
TX1)-1

Client mode

For details, see 2.6.2


Configuring the
Service Mode.

52TOM-201
(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1

GE

For details, see 2.6.4


Configuring the
Service Type.

Step 3 Search for OMS trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM
Trails.
Step 4 Create four bidirectional OCh trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.4.1 Creating an
OCh Trail.
NOTE

In the case of an OCh trail without dynamic cross-connections, that is, with pure static cross-connections,
you need not create such an OCh manually.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-97

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Table 2-14 Parameter planning for an OCh trail


Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail-1

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

NE4shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

OCh-trail-2

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

NE2shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

OCh-trail-3

Bidirectional

NE2shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

NE3shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

OCh-trail-4

Bidirectional

NE3shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

NE4shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

Step 5 Search for OTUk trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM
Trails.
Step 6 Create two bidirectional ODU2 trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.4.2 Creating an
ODUk Trail.
Table 2-15 Parameter planning for an ODU2 trail
Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-CardSlot-PortChannel

Sink NEShelf-CardSlot-PortChannel

Server Link

ODU2-trail-1

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-5-52NS2
-51
(ODU1LP)-1

NE4shelf3-11-52NS
2-51
(ODU1LP)-1

OCh-trail-1

ODU2-trail-2

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-11-52NS
2-51
(ODU1LP)-1

NE4shelf3-5-52NS2
-51
(ODU1LP)-1

OCh-trail-2,
OCh-trail-3,
OCh-trail-4,

Step 7 Create two bidirectional ODU1 trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.4.2 Creating an
ODUk Trail.

2-98

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Table 2-16 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail


Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-CardSlot-PortChannel

Sink NEShelf-CardSlot-PortChannel

Server Link

ODU1-trail-1

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-1-52TO
M-201
(ClientLP1)-1

NE4shelf3-1-52TO
M-201
(ClientLP1)-1

ODU2-trail-1

ODU1-trail-2

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-1-52TO
M-203
(ClientLP3)-1

NE4shelf3-1-52TO
M-203
(ClientLP3)-1

ODU2-trail-2

Step 8 Create a bidirectional GE service with the SNCP protection. For details about the operation, see
2.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails.
Table 2-17 Parameter planning for a GE service
Name

Level

Directi
on

Source
NEShelfSlotCardPort

Sink
NEShelfSlotCardPort

Dual
Fed/
Selectiv
e
Receivi
ng NE

Server
Link for
the
Workin
g Route

Server
Link for
the
Protecti
on
Route

GEtrail-1

Client

Bidirecti
onal

NE1shelf3-152TOM3(RX/
TX)

NE4shelf3-152TOM3(RX/
TX)

NE1,
NE4

ODU1trail-1

ODU1trail-2

----End

Result
If you select Bidirectional when creating a trail, one unidirectional trail group is displayed in
the WDM Trail Management window after the creation.

2.1.18 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the


OptiX OSN 6800 with the Cross-Layer Trail Creation Method
This configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure a
GE service with the SNCP protection.
2.1.18.1 Networking Configuration
This configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure a
GE service on a ring network.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-99

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.1.18.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning


This topic describes how to configure the GE service signal flow and how to plan parameters
for each trail.
2.1.18.3 Configuration Process
This configuration example illustrates how to configure a GE service with the SNCP protection
with the cross-layer creation method. In addition, the example provides details about the process
for configuring a GE service. Specifically, a GE service is created directly on an OCh link.

2.1.18.1 Networking Configuration


This configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure a
GE service on a ring network.

Service Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-44, four optical NEs, which are NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4, consist of a
ring network. Each site is an OADM site. In this case, the service requirements are as follows:
To enable communication between User 1 and User 2, a bidirectional GE service with the SNCP
protection is required between NE1 and NE4.
Figure 2-44 Networking configuration for a GE service

Card Configuration
In this example, one 52TOM card and two 52NS2 cards are configured on both NE1 and NE4
and two 52NS2 cards are configured on both NE2 and NE3.
2-100

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-45 Card configuration

2.1.18.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning


This topic describes how to configure the GE service signal flow and how to plan parameters
for each trail.

Service Signal Flow


A bidirectional GE service with the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) exists between
NE1 and NE4. The working route is NE1->NE4 and the protection route is NE1->NE2->NE3>NE4.
Figure 2-46 shows the signal flow between NE1 and NE4. Figure 2-47 shows the intra-station
signal flow of NE1 and NE4.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-101

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-46 GE service signal flow

Figure 2-47 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE4

2-102

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Parameter Planning
If you create a GE service with the cross-layer creation method, you can create the service
directly on an OCh link because the ODU2 and ODU1 server trails are generated automatically
during the creation of the GE service. In the network provided in the example, the server trails
include OTS, OMS, OCh, ODU2, and ODU1 trails. Among them, the OTS and OMS trails can
be searched out directly and need not be created manually. Hence, you only need to create an
OCh trail and the GE service.
Since the GE service is a dual fed and selective receiving service, a working route and a protection
route exist for the service. Therefore, in addition to the creation of the GE service, you also need
to create server trails for the working route and protection route. In the tables below, trail-1
represents the server trail of the working route and trail-2, trail-3, trail-4 represents the server
trail of the protection route.
NOTE

The GE service has both the working route that is NE1->NE4 and the protection route that is NE1->NE2>NE3->NE4.
l The working route traverses the following OCh trail: OCh-trail-1.
l The protection route traverses the following OCh trails: OCh-trail-2 (that is, NE1->NE2), OCh-trail-3
(that is, NE2->NE3), and OCh-trail-4 (that is, NE3->NE4).
When creating OCh trails, ensure that the wavelength of an OTU card matches the wavelength of a
connected multiplexer or demultiplexer card.
l

In the case of a static multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as M40 and MR2, the wavelength of
the OTU card must be the same as the wavelength of the port on the multiplexer or demultiplexer
card that is connected to the OTU card.

In the case of a dynamic multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as WMS9 and RMU9, the
wavelength of the OTU card must match the band of the multiplexer or demultiplexer card that is
connected to the OTU card.

In the preceding example, cards WSM9 and WSD9 belong to even bands. Therefore, you need to
select even wavelengths for the wavelength of the NE2 card.

Table 2-18 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail-1

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

NE4shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

OCh-trail-2

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

NE2shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

OCh-trail-3

Bidirectional

NE2shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

NE3shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

OCh-trail-4

Bidirectional

NE3shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

NE4shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-103

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Table 2-19 Parameter planning for a GE service


Name

Level

Directi
on

Source
NEShelfSlotCardPort

Sink
NEShelfSlotCardPort

Dual
Fed/
Selectiv
e
Receivi
ng NE

Server
Link for
the
Workin
g Route

Server
Link for
the
Protecti
on
Route

GEtrail-1

Client

Bidirecti
onal

NE1shelf3-152TOM3(RX/
TX)

NE4shelf3-152TOM3(RX/
TX)

NE1,
NE4

OChtrail-1

OChtrail-2,
OChtrail-3,
OChtrail-4

2.1.18.3 Configuration Process


This configuration example illustrates how to configure a GE service with the SNCP protection
with the cross-layer creation method. In addition, the example provides details about the process
for configuring a GE service. Specifically, a GE service is created directly on an OCh link.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Context
NOTE

l The 52TOM card can be applied to twelve scenarios. In this application, Non-Cascading ODU1
tributary mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) mode is used. For information on other scenarios, navigate
through topics 2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board in the Help.
l The total speed of services at each group of ClientLP ports cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.
l For a GE service, each group of ClientLP ports can support one signal at most.
NOTE

l In this application, the client-side logical ports inside the 52TOM card is divided into four groups:
ClientLP1 and ClientLP2, ClientLP3 and ClientLP4, ClientLP5 and ClientLP6, together with
ClientLP7 and ClientLP8. Ports in the same group cannot be used at the same time. For example, if
you configure a cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, you cannot configure
another cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1. The same restriction applies
to ports of other groups.
l The total speed of services at eight pairs of client-side optical ports cannot be higher than 10 Gbit/s.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the working mode of the 52TOM cards on NE1 and NE4 where GE services are added or
dropped.

2-104

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Type

Name

Working Mode

Configuration
Method

Card

52TOM

Non-Cascading

Port

ClientLP1,
ClientLP3

ODU1 tributary
mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1)

For details, see


2.6.1.3 Configuring
the Working Mode
of the 52TOM
Board.

Step 2 Set the service type and service mode of the WDM interface on the 52TOM card.
Card-Optical PortChannel

Service Type

Service Mode

Configuration
Method

52TOM-3(RX1/
TX1)-1

Client mode

For details, see 2.6.2


Configuring the
Service Mode.

52TOM-201
(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1

GE

For details, see 2.6.4


Configuring the
Service Type.

Step 3 Search for OMS trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM
Trails.
Step 4 Create four bidirectional OCh trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.4.1 Creating an
OCh Trail.
NOTE

l In the case of an OCh trail without dynamic cross-connections, that is, with pure static crossconnections, you need not create such an OCh trail manually. Such an OCh trail can be searched out
directly after a trail search.
l If the source card and sink card of the OCh trail are cards such as L2DGD and L2QMD that can be
used for intra-card 1+1 protection, you must perform the trail search to search for OTUk trails after
the OCh trail is created. Otherwise, the cross-layer creation of a Client trail is affected. Specifically,
the created Client trail is inconsistent with the Client trail searched out after the trail search.

Table 2-20 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail-1

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

NE4shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

OCh-trail-2

Bidirectional

NE1shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

NE2shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-105

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail-3

Bidirectional

NE2shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

NE3shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

OCh-trail-4

Bidirectional

NE3shelf3-11-52NS
2-(IN/OUT)

NE4shelf3-5-52NS2
-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

Step 5 Create a bidirectional GE service with the SNCP protection. For details about the operation, see
2.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails.
Table 2-21 Parameter planning for a GE service
Name

Level

Directi
on

Source
NEShelfSlotCardPort

Sink
NEShelfSlotCardPort

Dual
Fed/
Selectiv
e
Receivi
ng NE

Server
Link for
the
Workin
g Route

Server
Link for
the
Protecti
on
Route

GEtrail-1

Client

Bidirecti
onal

NE1shelf3-152TOM3(RX/
TX)

NE4shelf3-152TOM3(RX/
TX)

NE1,
NE4

OChtrail-1

OChtrail-2,
OChtrail-3,
OChtrail-4

----End

Result
If you select Bidirectional when creating a trail, one unidirectional trail group is displayed in
the WDM Trail Management window after the creation.

2.1.19 Application Example: Configuring an ODU1 Trail by Using


the Cross-Layer Creation Function (52TOM, ODU0 Tributary-Line
Mode(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))
This topic describes how to configure an ODU1 trail on the OptiX OSN 6800.
2.1.19.1 Configuration Networking Diagram
This topic describes how to configure an ODU1 trail on the OptiX OSN 6800. This configuration
example adopts a link network.
2.1.19.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning
This topic describes how to configure the ODU1 service signal flow and how to plan parameters
for each trail.
2-106

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.1.19.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to create an ODU1 trail on the OptiX OSN 6800. The ODU1 trail does
not need to be created. You can search for ODU1 trails after configuring OTU1 crossconnections in the NE Explorer.

2.1.19.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This topic describes how to configure an ODU1 trail on the OptiX OSN 6800. This configuration
example adopts a link network.

Service Requirements
Figure 2-48 shows a link network that consists of two optical NEs, that is, NE1 and NE2. Each
NE is an OTM station. The service requirements are as follows:
User 1 can communicate with User 2 and a bidirectional ODU1 service exists between NE1 and
NE2.
Figure 2-48 Configuration networking diagram of an ODU1 trail

Card Configuration
In this example, one 52TOM card is configured on both NE1 and NE2.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-107

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-49 Card configuration

2.1.19.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning


This topic describes how to configure the ODU1 service signal flow and how to plan parameters
for each trail.

Service Signal Flow


A bidirectional ODU1 service exists between NE1 and NE2.
Figure 2-50 shows the service flow from NE1 to NE2. Figure 2-51 shows the intra-station signal
flow of NE1 and NE2.
Figure 2-50 ODU1 service signal flow

2-108

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-51 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE2

Parameter Planning
Server trails need to be created before you create an ODU1 trail. In the network provided in the
example, the server trails include OMS, OCh, and OTU1 trails. The OMS trail can be searched
out directly and need not be created manually. Therefore, you only need to create an OCh trail
(OCh-trail) before creating an ODU1 trail.
NOTE

When creating OCh trails, ensure that the wavelength of an OTU card matches the wavelength of a
connected multiplexer or demultiplexer card.
l

In the case of a static multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as M40 and MR2, the wavelength of
the OTU card must be the same as the wavelength of the port on the multiplexer or demultiplexer
card that is connected to the OTU card.

In the case of a dynamic multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as WMS9 and RMU9, the
wavelength of the OTU card must match the band of the multiplexer or demultiplexer card that is
connected to the OTU card.

In the preceding example, cards WSM9 and WSD9 belong to even bands. Therefore, you need to
select even wavelengths for the wavelength of the NE2 card.

Set the 52TOM card to the cascading mode and its port to the working mode of ODU0 tributaryline (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). You need to set 10(RX8/TX8) as a line-side port. In this
mode, you cannot search for OTU1 trails. You can search for an ODU1 trail only after
configuring the OTU1 cross-connections in the NE Explorer.
NOTE

In this scenario, port 10(RX8/TX8) is available only after its service mode is set to OTN Mode and its
port type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-109

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Table 2-22 Parameter planning for an OCh trail


Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail

Bidirectional

NE1shelf0-2-52TO
M-10(RX8/
TX8)

NE2shelf0-2-52TO
M-10(RX8/
TX8)

2\1529.55
\196.000

Table 2-23 Parameter planning for OTU1 cross-connections


Level

Direction

Source NE-ShelfSlot-Card-PortChannel

Sink NE-ShelfSlot-Card-PortChannel

OTU1

Bidirectional

NE1shelf0-2-52TOM-51
(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1

NE1shelf0-2-52TOM-10
(RX8/TX8)-1

OTU1

Bidirectional

NE2shelf0-2-52TOM-51
(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1

NE2shelf0-2-52TOM-10
(RX8/TX8)-1

Table 2-24 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail


Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-PortChannel

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-PortChannel

Server Link

ODU1-trail

Bidirectional

NE1shelf0-2-52TO
M-161
(ODU0LP1)-1

NE2shelf0-2-52TO
M-161
(ODU0LP1)-1

OCh-trail

2.1.19.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to create an ODU1 trail on the OptiX OSN 6800. The ODU1 trail does
not need to be created. You can search for ODU1 trails after configuring OTU1 crossconnections in the NE Explorer.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.
2-110

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Context
NOTE

l The 52TOM card can be applied to 12 scenarios. In this scenario, Cascading ODU0 tributary mode
(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) mode is used. For information about other scenarios, navigate
through 2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board.
l The ClientLP1 port and ClientLP2 port share a channel, but this channel cannot be used by both ports
at the same time. Therefore, if the 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service is configured, the 202
(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service cannot be configured.
l The total rates of incoming services at each group of ClientLP ports cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/
s.
l In the case of a GE service, each group of ClientLP ports supports only one input signal.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the working mode of the 52TOM cards on NE1 and NE4 where GE services are added or
dropped.
Type

Name

Working Mode

Configuration
Method

Card

52TOM

Cascading

Port

ClientLP1

ODU0 tributary
mode (Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1)

For details, see


2.6.1.3 Configuring
the Working Mode
of the 52TOM
Board.

Step 2 Set the service mode of the WDM port on the 52TOM cards.
Card-Optical PortChannel

Service Mode

Configuration Method

52TOM-10(RX8/TX8)-1

OTN Mode

For details, see 2.6.2


Configuring the Service
Mode.

Step 3 Set the port type of the WDM port on the 52TOM cards.
Card-Optical Port

Type

Configuration Method

52TOM-10(RX8/TX8)

Line Side Color Optical Port

You need to delete this port


first. Then, add the port again
and modify the port type. For
details, see 2.6.5 Modifying
Port.

Step 4 Search for OMS trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM
Trails.
Step 5 Create a bidirectional OCh trail. For details, see 2.1.4.1 Creating an OCh Trail.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-111

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management


NOTE

l In the case of an OCh trail without dynamic cross-connections, that is, with pure static crossconnections, you need not create such an OCh trail manually. Such an OCh trail can be searched out
directly after a trail search.
l If the source card and sink card of the OCh trail are cards such as L2DGD and L2QMD that can be
used for intra-card 1+1 protection, you must perform the trail search to search for OTUk trails after
the OCh trail is created. Otherwise, the cross-layer creation of a Client trail is affected. Specifically,
the created Client trail is inconsistent with the Client trail searched out after the trail search.

Table 2-25 Parameter planning for an OCh trail


Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail

Bidirectional

NE1shelf0-2-52TO
M-10(RX8/
TX8)

NE2shelf0-2-52TO
M-10(RX8/
TX8)

2\1529.55
\196.000

Step 6 Create two OTU1 cross-connections. For details, see 2.6.6 Creating Cross-Connections.
Table 2-26 Parameter planning for OTU1 cross-connections
Level

Direction

Source NE-ShelfSlot-Card-PortChannel

Sink NE-ShelfSlot-Card-PortChannel

OTU1

Bidirectional

NE1shelf0-2-52TOM-51
(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1

NE1shelf0-2-52TOM-10
(RX8/TX8)-1

OTU1

Bidirectional

NE2shelf0-2-52TOM-51
(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1

NE2shelf0-2-52TOM-10
(RX8/TX8)-1

Step 7 Search for ODU1 trails. For details, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM Trails. After the search,
the ODU1 trail is displayed in the WDM Trail Management window.
Table 2-27 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail

2-112

Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-PortChannel

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-PortChannel

Server Link

ODU1-trail

Bidirectional

NE1shelf0-2-52TO
M-161
(ODU0LP1)-1

NE2shelf0-2-52TO
M-161
(ODU0LP1)-1

OCh-trail

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

When creating trails by using the trail search function, name the new trails according to the custom naming
rules for WDM trails.

----End

Result
If you select Bidirectional when creating a trail, one unidirectional trail group is displayed in
the WDM Trail Management window after the creation.

2.1.20 Application Example: Configuring an Any Service by Using


the Cross-Layer Creation Function (52TOM, ODU0 Tributary Mode
(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]))
This topic describes how to configure an Any service on the OptiX OSN 8800 series.
2.1.20.1 Configuration Networking Diagram
This topic describes how to configure an Any service on the OptiX OSN 8800 series. This
configuration example adopts a link network.
2.1.20.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning
This topic describes how to configure the Any service signal flow and how to plan parameters
for each trail.
2.1.20.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to create an Any service on the OptiX OSN 8800 series.

2.1.20.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This topic describes how to configure an Any service on the OptiX OSN 8800 series. This
configuration example adopts a link network.

Service Requirements
Figure 2-52 shows a link network that consists of two optical NEs, that is, NE1 and NE2. Each
NE is an OTM station. The service requirements are as follows:
User 1 can communicate with User 2 and a bidirectional Any service exists between NE1 and
NE2.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-113

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Figure 2-52 Configuration networking diagram of an Any service

Card Configuration
In this example, one 52TOM card and one 52NS2 card are configured on both NE1 and NE2.

2-114

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-53 Card configuration

2.1.20.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning


This topic describes how to configure the Any service signal flow and how to plan parameters
for each trail.

Service Signal Flow


A bidirectional Any service exists between NE1 and NE2.
Figure 2-54 shows the service flow from NE1 to NE2. Figure 2-55 shows the intra-station signal
flow of NE1 and NE2.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-115

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Figure 2-54 Any service signal flow

Figure 2-55 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE2

Parameter Planning
Server trails need to be created before you create an Any service. In the network provided in the
example, the server trails include OMS, OCh, OTUk, and ODUk trails. Among them, the OMS
trail can be searched out directly and need not be created manually. Since the U2000 supports
the cross-layer creation of trails, the Any service can be created on an OCh trail directly.
Therefore, you only need to create an OCh trail (OCh-trail) before creating an Any service.
Set the 52TOM card to cascading mode and its port to the working mode of ODU0 tributary
(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]).

2-116

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

When creating OCh trails, ensure that the wavelength of an OTU card matches the wavelength of a
connected multiplexer or demultiplexer card.
l

In the case of a static multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as M40 and MR2, the wavelength of
the OTU card must be the same as the wavelength of the port on the multiplexer or demultiplexer
card that is connected to the OTU card.

In the case of a dynamic multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as WMS9 and RMU9, the
wavelength of the OTU card must match the band of the multiplexer or demultiplexer card that is
connected to the OTU card.

In the preceding example, cards WSM9 and WSD9 belong to even bands. Therefore, you need to
select even wavelengths for the wavelength of the NE2 card.

Table 2-28 Parameter planning for an OCh trail


Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail

Bidirectional

NE1shelf0-2-52NS2
-1(IN/OUT)

NE2shelf0-2-52NS2
-1(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

Table 2-29 Parameter planning for the Any service


Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-PortChannel

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-PortChannel

Server Link

Any-trail

Bidirectional

NE1shelf0-1-52TO
M-3(RX1/TX1)

NE2shelf0-1-52TO
M-3(RX1/TX1)

OCh-trail

2.1.20.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to create an Any service on the OptiX OSN 8800 series.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-117

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Context
NOTE

l The 52TOM card can be applied to 12 scenarios. In this application, Cascading ODU0 tributary mode
(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) mode is used. For information about other scenarios, navigate through 2.6.1
Configuring the Working Mode of the Board in the Help.
l In the case of a port in ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) on a cascading card, OptiX
OSN 8800 I and OptiX OSN 8800 II do not support the grooming of ODU1 trails.
l In the case of a port in ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) on a cascading card, OptiX
OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800 do not support the grooming of ODU0 trails.
l Each optical port supports a client-side signal at the maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. The total rate of
client-side incoming services at the eight pairs of optical ports cannot be higher than 2.5 Gbit/s.
l The total rate of services at each group of ClientLP ports cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s. In the case
of a GE service, each group of ClientLP ports supports only one input signal.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the working mode of the 52TOM cards on NE1 and NE2 where the Any service is added or
dropped.
Type

Name

Working Mode

Configuration
Method

Card

52TOM

Cascading

Port

ClientLP1

ODU0 tributary
mode (Any->ODU0
[->ODU1])

For details, see


2.6.1.3 Configuring
the Working Mode
of the 52TOM
Board.

Step 2 Set the service type and service mode of the WDM port on the 52TOM cards.
Card-Optical PortChannel

Service Type

Service Mode

Configuration
Method

52TOM-3(RX1/
TX1)-1

Client mode

For details, see 2.6.2


Configuring the
Service Mode.

52TOM-201
(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1

Any

For details, see 2.6.4


Configuring the
Service Type.

Step 3 Search for OMS trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM
Trails.
Step 4 Create a bidirectional OCh trail. For details, see 2.1.4.1 Creating an OCh Trail.

2-118

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

l In the case of an OCh trail without dynamic cross-connections, that is, with pure static crossconnections, you need not create such an OCh trail manually. Such an OCh trail can be searched out
directly after a trail search.
l If the source card and sink card of the OCh trail are cards such as L2DGD and L2QMD that can be
used for intra-card 1+1 protection, you must perform the trail search to search for OTUk trails after
the OCh trail is created. Otherwise, the cross-layer creation of a Client trail is affected. Specifically,
the created Client trail is inconsistent with the Client trail searched out after the trail search.

Table 2-30 Parameter planning for an OCh trail


Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail

Bidirectional

NE1shelf0-2-52NS2
-1(IN/OUT)

NE2shelf0-2-52NS2
-1(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55
\196.000

Step 5 Create an Any service. For details, see 2.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails.
Table 2-31 Parameter planning for the Any service
Name

Direction

Source NEShelf-SlotCard-PortChannel

Sink NEShelf-SlotCard-PortChannel

Server Link

Any-trail

Bidirectional

NE1shelf0-1-52TO
M-3(RX1/TX1)

NE2shelf0-1-52TO
M-3(RX1/TX1)

OCh-trail

----End

Result
If you select Bidirectional when creating a trail, one unidirectional trail group is displayed in
the WDM Trail Management window after the creation.

2.2 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection


The optical layer multipath protection can fully utilize the existing idle line resources of the
network. Through the optical cross-connections of the WSS boards, this protection offers
automatic and flexible selection of the protection paths in the protection switching.
2.2.1 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection Automatically
This topic describes the procedures for configuring the optical layer multipath protection
automatically, including information on how to create, delete the protection and modify
parameters.
2.2.2 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection Manually
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-119

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

This topic describes the procedures for configuring the optical layer multipath protection
manually, including information on how to create, delete the protection and modify parameters.

2.2.1 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection


Automatically
This topic describes the procedures for configuring the optical layer multipath protection
automatically, including information on how to create, delete the protection and modify
parameters.
2.2.1.1 Configuration Principle
When configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to learn the following
principles to configure the protection properly.
2.2.1.2 Enabling the WSS Function on an NE
Before configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to enable the WSS function
on NEs that are used in this protection. In this manner, these NEs can gain information about
the topology networkwide through the discovery function for adjacent NEs. When a fiber cut
occurs in a path that carries services, the NEs can be on the rerouted path for the optical layer
multipath protection.
2.2.1.3 Creating a Working Cross-Connection for an NE
You need to create cross-connections on a per-NE basis, which ensures that the working path
that carries services passes the WSS boards.
2.2.1.4 Searching for WDM Trails
After you set up fiber connections on NEs, the corresponding trail information cannot be found
at the network layer on the U2000. To implement the WDM trail management, you need to
establish the end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer on the U2000 by searching for the
cross-connections and fiber connections in the network.
2.2.1.5 Creating Optical Layer Multipath Protection Automatically
By using the function of creating the optical layer multipath protection for the OCh trail
automatically, the users need not learn the detailed route information about this protection. The
U2000 creates the optical cross-connections for the protection automatically in the WSS boards
according to the utilization of resources networkwide. Creating the optical layer multipath
protection automatically can simplify the configuration procedure and avoid incorrect
operations.
2.2.1.6 Modifying the Parameters of Optical Layer Multipath Protection
For the optical layer multipath protection that is created, you can query the working path and
modify the corresponding parameters on the U2000.

2.2.1.1 Configuration Principle


When configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to learn the following
principles to configure the protection properly.
The common principles for the configuration of the optical layer multipath protection are as
follows:

2-120

Plan the wavelengths networkwide. Configure a unique wavelength for each service to
prevent wavelength conflict in switching.

Reserve wavelength resources for the protection when you plan the network.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

The WSD+WSM networking is recommended, so that no wavelength conflict occurs in


services.

The protection cannot be configured for the FOADM station and ROADM station of the
DWC network.

Configure the logical fiber connections that are consistent with the actual networking on
the U2000.

When a fiber cut occurs in the working path, NEs find a protection path through rerouting.
Meanwhile, the U2000 switches the services to the protection path. If a fiber cut occurs in
the protection path and the working path remains faulty, NEs will find another protection
path through rerouting again.

Create an OCh trail as the working path before creating the optical layer multipath
protection. It is recommended that you create the optical cross-connections on a per-NE
basis and form an OCh trail through the search function. If you create the optical crossconnections by trail, you need to plan the network first to ensure that the created trail passes
the WSS boards.

You need not create the protection cross-connections within the WSS boards. The crossconnections of the route can be viewed on NEs only when the protection switching
(rerouting) occurs.

2.2.1.2 Enabling the WSS Function on an NE


Before configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to enable the WSS function
on NEs that are used in this protection. In this manner, these NEs can gain information about
the topology networkwide through the discovery function for adjacent NEs. When a fiber cut
occurs in a path that carries services, the NEs can be on the rerouted path for the optical layer
multipath protection.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

In a network with the optical layer multipath protection, you can enable the WSS functions for a maximum of
50 NEs.

Procedure
Step 1 Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Enable WSS from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query to query the information about the configured WSS from an NE.
Step 3 In the Enable WSS drop-down list, set the parameters on the U2000.

Step 4 Click Apply to issue the configuration.


Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-121

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 5 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
----End

2.2.1.3 Creating a Working Cross-Connection for an NE


You need to create cross-connections on a per-NE basis, which ensures that the working path
that carries services passes the WSS boards.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The external and internal fiber connections of NEs must be established and the boundary ports
must be configured.
It must be applicable to the WSS boards.

Background Information
When configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to adjust the optical power
attenuations of all stations on the working path by using the OptiX MDS 5600, so as to deliver
best-quality services. In the optical layer multipath protection, when a switching occurs, the
configurations for all boards on the working path are unchanged. Therefore, when the services
are switched back to the working path, the services can reach the best-quality state quickly.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection
Management from the Function Tree. Click the Board Optical Cross-Connection tab.
Step 2 Click New and the Create Optical Cross-Connection dialog box is displayed.

2-122

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 3 According to the network plan, set the Cross-Connect Type, Source Slot, Source Port, Source
Band, Source Wavelength No., Sink Port, Activation Status.
NOTE

The Cross-Connec Type should be set to Common Cross-Connection.

Step 4 Click OK.


----End

2.2.1.4 Searching for WDM Trails


After you set up fiber connections on NEs, the corresponding trail information cannot be found
at the network layer on the U2000. To implement the WDM trail management, you need to
establish the end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer on the U2000 by searching for the
cross-connections and fiber connections in the network.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.
Fiber connections must be created correctly for the WDM equipment, and the logical fiber
connections that correspond to the physical fiber connections must be configured on the
U2000.
The license of the U2000 supports the WDM trail management.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-123

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.

NOTE

l In the mode of searching by subnet, the selected subnet range should be independent from the
networking aspect. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the area
that beyond the selected subnet range.
l If you select Hide optional trails, the third-party wavelength services can be searched out because
they are not filtered out during verification.

Step 3 Click Next to begin to search for trails. The U2000 takes some time to return the results,
depending on the number of services.
NOTE

l If there are cross-connections that are collisions and these cross-connections cannot form end to end
trails, the U2000 shows the conflicting trails after you perform the search operation.
l The principles of verifying a conflict trail are as follows: The networking changes. The trail may cause
interruption of service flow. For example, the key information of the trail, including deleting a crossconnection or fiber, is verified.

Step 4 Optional: Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. Select the trail to set the trail
management flag.
NOTE

Skip this step if the Automatically create trails after searching policy is selected in Step 2.

Step 5 Click Next to view all discrete services in the target network.
NOTE

If Step 4 is executed, the U2000 deletes trails that do not have the management flag from the network layer.
This does not affect services of the actual NE or the data of an individual NE on the U2000.

Step 6 After the search is complete, click Finish.


----End
2-124

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.2.1.5 Creating Optical Layer Multipath Protection Automatically


By using the function of creating the optical layer multipath protection for the OCh trail
automatically, the users need not learn the detailed route information about this protection. The
U2000 creates the optical cross-connections for the protection automatically in the WSS boards
according to the utilization of resources networkwide. Creating the optical layer multipath
protection automatically can simplify the configuration procedure and avoid incorrect
operations.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.
At least one single-sourced and single-sinked OCh trail must be created and activated for
carrying services.
The optical layer multipath protection must be enabled.
The license of the U2000 supports the WDM trail management.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria and click Filter All.
The trails are displayed in the list.
NOTE

l Click Filter All to display all the trails that meet the specified criteria.
l Click Secondary Filter to filter the displayed trails based on the filter criteria.
l Click Incremental Filter to add the new filter result to the end of the trail list without refreshing the
existing trail records in the list.

Step 3 Select an OCh trail, right-click, and then choose Set WSS Protection Automatically from the
shortcut menu.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-125

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Step 4 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed,indicating the operation is successful. Click
Close.
NOTE

l After you successfully configure the optical layer multipath protection, the working path is equipped
with the optical layer multipath protection. The protection path, however, is not displayed in the WDM
Trail Management window at the moment.
l When a switching occurs in the optical layer multipath protection that is created automatically, the
U2000 reports an abnormal event, informing the user of the switching of services. After you search for
the trails, the trail information is refreshed and the working path and protection path are displayed in
the WDM Trail Management window.

Step 5 Optional: To clear the optical layer multipath protection that is previously configured, select
an OCh trail with the protection, right-click, and then choose Clear WSS Protection from the
shortcut menu.
NOTE

l When changing the wavelengths of the OTUs, you need to delete the optical layer multipath protection
first. After setting the wavelengths of the OTUs, configure the optical layer multipath protection again.
l If the protection is deleted when the services are running in the protection path, the services are switched
back to the working path automatically after the deletion, even when the working path is faulty.

----End

2.2.1.6 Modifying the Parameters of Optical Layer Multipath Protection


For the optical layer multipath protection that is created, you can query the working path and
modify the corresponding parameters on the U2000.
2-126

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.
The optical layer multipath protection must be created.
The license of the U2000 supports the WDM trail management.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria and click Filter All.
The trails are displayed in the list.
NOTE

l Click Filter All to display all the trails that meet the specified criteria.
l Click Secondary Filter to filter the displayed trails based on the filter criteria.
l Click Incremental Filter to add the new filter result to the end of the trail list without refreshing the
existing trail records in the list.

Step 3 Select a trail of the optical layer multipath protection and choose Maintenance > WSS
Protection Management. The WSS Protection Management window is displayed.
Step 4 Optional: In the WSS Protection Management window, click Query to query the Switching
Status and the Current Status of trails.
NOTE

When opening the WSS Protection Management window, you can query only the parameters of the
protection group on the U2000. You cannot query the Switching Status and the Current Status of trails
because they are not updated. The U2000 queries the status of the optical layer multipath protection on
NEs only when you click Query. Otherwise, the status information about the protection is not updated on
the U2000.

Step 5 In the WSS Protection Management dialog box, set the Revertive mode and WTR Time(s).

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-127

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

NOTE

l The WTR Time(s) can be set only when the Revertive mode is set to Revertive.
l The U2000 queries the status of the optical layer multipath protection on NEs only when you click
Query.

Step 6 Click Apply to apply the settings to NEs.


Step 7 Optional: Click Function, you can select Lockout, Force to Protection, or Clear.
NOTE

The options Lockout and Force to Protection can be selected only when the optical layer multipath
protection is configured manually.

----End

2.2.2 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection Manually


This topic describes the procedures for configuring the optical layer multipath protection
manually, including information on how to create, delete the protection and modify parameters.
2.2.2.1 Configuration Principle
When configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to learn the following
principles to configure the protection properly.
2.2.2.2 Enabling the WSS Function on an NE
Before configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to enable the WSS function
on NEs that are used in this protection. In this manner, these NEs can gain information about
the topology networkwide through the discovery function for adjacent NEs. When a fiber cut
occurs in a path that carries services, the NEs can be on the rerouted path for the optical layer
multipath protection.
2.2.2.3 Creating a Working Cross-Connection for an NE
You need to create cross-connections on a per-NE basis, which ensures that the working path
that carries services passes the WSS boards.
2.2.2.4 Creating the Protection Cross-Connection on NEs
Before creating the optical layer multipath protection manually, you need to create protection
cross-connections for the WSS boards at the source and sink ends of the working path.
2.2.2.5 Searching for WDM Trails
After you set up fiber connections on NEs, the corresponding trail information cannot be found
at the network layer on the U2000. To implement the WDM trail management, you need to
establish the end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer on the U2000 by searching for the
cross-connections and fiber connections in the network.
2.2.2.6 Creating Optical Layer Multipath Protection Manually
By creating the optical layer multipath protection for the OCh trail manually, you can learn the
details about the configuration of the protection cross-connections and routes of the optical layer
multipath protection.
2.2.2.7 Modifying the Parameters of Optical Layer Multipath Protection
For the optical layer multipath protection that is created, you can query the working path and
modify the corresponding parameters on the U2000.

2-128

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.2.2.1 Configuration Principle


When configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to learn the following
principles to configure the protection properly.
The common principles for the configuration of the optical layer multipath protection are as
follows:
l

Plan the wavelengths networkwide. Configure a unique wavelength for each service to
prevent wavelength conflict in switching.

Reserve wavelength resources for the protection when you plan the network.

The WSD+WSM networking is recommended, so that no wavelength conflict occurs in


services.

The protection cannot be configured for the FOADM station and ROADM station of the
DWC network.

Configure the logical fiber connections that are consistent with the actual networking on
the U2000.

When a fiber cut occurs in the working path, NEs find a protection path through rerouting.
Meanwhile, the U2000 switches the services to the protection path. If a fiber cut occurs in
the protection path and the working path remains faulty, NEs will find another protection
path through rerouting again.

Create an OCh trail as the working path before creating the optical layer multipath
protection. It is recommended that you create the optical cross-connections on a per-NE
basis and form an OCh trail through the search function. If you create the optical crossconnections by trail, you need to plan the network first to ensure that the created trail passes
the WSS boards.

You need not create the protection cross-connections within the WSS boards. The crossconnections of the route can be viewed on NEs only when the protection switching
(rerouting) occurs.

2.2.2.2 Enabling the WSS Function on an NE


Before configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to enable the WSS function
on NEs that are used in this protection. In this manner, these NEs can gain information about
the topology networkwide through the discovery function for adjacent NEs. When a fiber cut
occurs in a path that carries services, the NEs can be on the rerouted path for the optical layer
multipath protection.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

In a network with the optical layer multipath protection, you can enable the WSS functions for a maximum of
50 NEs.

Procedure
Step 1 Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Enable WSS from the Function Tree.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-129

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 2 Click Query to query the information about the configured WSS from an NE.
Step 3 In the Enable WSS drop-down list, set the parameters on the U2000.

Step 4 Click Apply to issue the configuration.


Step 5 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
----End

2.2.2.3 Creating a Working Cross-Connection for an NE


You need to create cross-connections on a per-NE basis, which ensures that the working path
that carries services passes the WSS boards.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The external and internal fiber connections of NEs must be established and the boundary ports
must be configured.
It must be applicable to the WSS boards.

Background Information
When configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to adjust the optical power
attenuations of all stations on the working path by using the OptiX MDS 5600, so as to deliver
best-quality services. In the optical layer multipath protection, when a switching occurs, the
configurations for all boards on the working path are unchanged. Therefore, when the services
are switched back to the working path, the services can reach the best-quality state quickly.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection
Management from the Function Tree. Click the Board Optical Cross-Connection tab.
Step 2 Click New and the Create Optical Cross-Connection dialog box is displayed.

2-130

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 3 According to the network plan, set the Cross-Connect Type, Source Slot, Source Port, Source
Band, Source Wavelength No., Sink Port, Activation Status.
NOTE

The Cross-Connec Type should be set to Common Cross-Connection.

Step 4 Click OK.


----End

2.2.2.4 Creating the Protection Cross-Connection on NEs


Before creating the optical layer multipath protection manually, you need to create protection
cross-connections for the WSS boards at the source and sink ends of the working path.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The common cross-connections for the working path must be created.
The source port and sink port of the protection cross-connection must be set as boundary ports.
Make sure that the wavelength used in the optical cross-connection for a board is not occupied
by the cross-connection on a per NE basis.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-131

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Background Information
l

Before creating the optical layer multipath protection manually, you need to create the
common cross-connections for services on the NEs and protection cross-connections for
the protection by using the functions at the NE layer. Later, by using the function at the
network layer, the information about optical cross-connections on NEs is reflected at the
network layer through searching. That is, the protection path is arranged by the user before
the optical layer multipath protection is created manually.

When you create the protection cross-connections on NEs, each common cross-connection
can have only one corresponding protection cross-connection. That is, when you create
cross-connections for the same wavelength, only a common cross-connection and a
protection cross-connection can be created as the same-source and different-sink crossconnections. The same is true for the creation of the same-sink and different-source crossconnections.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection
Management from the Function Tree. Click the Board Optical Cross-Connection tab.
Step 2 Click New and the Create Optical Cross-Connection dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 According to the network plan, set the Cross-Connect Type, Source Slot, Source Port, Source
Band, Source Wavelength No., Sink Port, Activation Status.
NOTE

l The Cross-Connect Type should be set to Protection Cross-Connection.


l When you create the working path manually, select Common Cross-Connection. When you create
the protection path for the optical layer multipath protection manually, select Protection CrossConnection. The Route Cross-Connection cannot be created manually on the U2000, Instead, the
route cross-connection is created automatically on the U2000 when a protection switching occurs. After
the protection switching is complete, the route cross-connection is cleared.

2-132

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 4 Click OK.


Step 5 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
----End

2.2.2.5 Searching for WDM Trails


After you set up fiber connections on NEs, the corresponding trail information cannot be found
at the network layer on the U2000. To implement the WDM trail management, you need to
establish the end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer on the U2000 by searching for the
cross-connections and fiber connections in the network.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.
Fiber connections must be created correctly for the WDM equipment, and the logical fiber
connections that correspond to the physical fiber connections must be configured on the
U2000.
The license of the U2000 supports the WDM trail management.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.

NOTE

l In the mode of searching by subnet, the selected subnet range should be independent from the
networking aspect. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the area
that beyond the selected subnet range.
l If you select Hide optional trails, the third-party wavelength services can be searched out because
they are not filtered out during verification.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-133

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Step 3 Click Next to begin to search for trails. The U2000 takes some time to return the results,
depending on the number of services.
NOTE

l If there are cross-connections that are collisions and these cross-connections cannot form end to end
trails, the U2000 shows the conflicting trails after you perform the search operation.
l The principles of verifying a conflict trail are as follows: The networking changes. The trail may cause
interruption of service flow. For example, the key information of the trail, including deleting a crossconnection or fiber, is verified.

Step 4 Optional: Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. Select the trail to set the trail
management flag.
NOTE

Skip this step if the Automatically create trails after searching policy is selected in Step 2.

Step 5 Click Next to view all discrete services in the target network.
NOTE

If Step 4 is executed, the U2000 deletes trails that do not have the management flag from the network layer.
This does not affect services of the actual NE or the data of an individual NE on the U2000.

Step 6 After the search is complete, click Finish.


----End

2.2.2.6 Creating Optical Layer Multipath Protection Manually


By creating the optical layer multipath protection for the OCh trail manually, you can learn the
details about the configuration of the protection cross-connections and routes of the optical layer
multipath protection.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.
At least one single-sourced and single-sinked OCh trail must be created and activated for
carrying services.
The protection cross-connections must be created on the NEs and trail search is performed.
The optical layer multipath protection must be enabled.
The license of the U2000 supports the WDM trail management.

Background Information

2-134

Before creating the optical layer multipath protection manually, you need to create the
protection cross-connections for the WSS boards on NEs. Later, establish a protection path
by searching the optical cross-connections on NEs. The protection path should have the
same source and sink as the working path. After that, you can set the parameters for the
optical layer multipath protection in the WDM Trail Management window.

When configuring the optical layer multipath protection manually, you need to first set the
parameters for the protection path, including the optical power attenuations for the boards
on the path, optical cross-connections, and gains of the OA boards, and finish
commissioning of the OSNR. The triggered switching only switches the optical crossconnections of the WSS boards at both ends of a path to implement the service switching.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria and click Filter All.
The trails are displayed in the list.
NOTE

l Click Filter All to display all the trails that meet the specified criteria.
l Click Secondary Filter to filter the displayed trails based on the filter criteria.
l Click Incremental Filter to add the new filter result to the end of the trail list without refreshing the
existing trail records in the list.

Step 3 Select an OCh trail, right-click, and then choose Set WSS Protection Manually from the
shortcut menu.

NOTE

Click Set WSS Protection Manually, the issues a command to the NE to trigger the binding between the
protection and working paths.

Step 4 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful.
Click Close.
NOTE

After you finishing setting the optical layer multipath protection, the working path and protection path are
always displayed in the WDM Trail Management window.

Step 5 Optional: To clear the optical layer multipath protection that is previously configured, select
an OCh trail with the protection, right-click, and then choose Clear WSS Protection from the
shortcut menu.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-135

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

NOTE

l When changing the wavelengths of the OTUs, you need to delete the optical layer multipath protection
first. After setting the wavelengths of the OTUs, configure the optical layer multipath protection again.
l Before deleting the protection, make sure that the services are running in the working path. If the
services are running in the protection path, the protection cannot be deleted. You need to lock the
services to the working path before deleting the protection.

----End

2.2.2.7 Modifying the Parameters of Optical Layer Multipath Protection


For the optical layer multipath protection that is created, you can query the working path and
modify the corresponding parameters on the U2000.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.
The optical layer multipath protection must be created.
The license of the U2000 supports the WDM trail management.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria and click Filter All.
The trails are displayed in the list.
NOTE

l Click Filter All to display all the trails that meet the specified criteria.
l Click Secondary Filter to filter the displayed trails based on the filter criteria.
l Click Incremental Filter to add the new filter result to the end of the trail list without refreshing the
existing trail records in the list.

Step 3 Select a trail of the optical layer multipath protection and choose Maintenance > WSS
Protection Management. The WSS Protection Management window is displayed.
Step 4 Optional: In the WSS Protection Management window, click Query to query the Switching
Status and the Current Status of trails.
NOTE

When opening the WSS Protection Management window, you can query only the parameters of the
protection group on the U2000. You cannot query the Switching Status and the Current Status of trails
because they are not updated. The U2000 queries the status of the optical layer multipath protection on
NEs only when you click Query. Otherwise, the status information about the protection is not updated on
the U2000.

Step 5 In the WSS Protection Management dialog box, set the Revertive mode and WTR Time(s).

2-136

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

l The WTR Time(s) can be set only when the Revertive mode is set to Revertive.
l The U2000 queries the status of the optical layer multipath protection on NEs only when you click
Query.

Step 6 Click Apply to apply the settings to NEs.


Step 7 Optional: Click Function, you can select Lockout, Force to Protection, or Clear.
NOTE

The options Lockout and Force to Protection can be selected only when the optical layer multipath
protection is configured manually.

----End

2.3 Configuring EAPE


The U2000 supports configuring the enhanced automatic power equalization (EAPE) for a trail.
By adjusting the optical power of a WDM trail, the EAPE can reduce or even eliminate bit errors
of services on the trail.
2.3.1 EAPE
The U2000 provides the enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium (EAPE) function. The
EAPE adjustment can be enabled to ensure that the receive-end signal quality of each channel
meets the preset requirement and that the services are available.
2.3.2 Creating an OCh Trail
The U2000 supports creating OCh trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the source
and sink of a service, the U2000 can generate an OCh trail based on the searched server trail.
The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure and ensures
proper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible manner in
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-137

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

application scenarios (deployment or expansion).Before creating an EAPE pair, you should


create OCh trails. The EAPE function uses OCh trails to identify EAPE pairs. In the case of the
equipment with the dynamic optical cross-connection boards, you can create OCh trails manually
by using the trail management function of the U2000.
2.3.3 Creating EAPE Objects
The U2000 supports configuring the enhanced automatic power equalization (EAPE) for a trail.
For a WDM service configured with the EAPE, the U2000 fine-tunes the optical power of the
transmit end according to signal quality detected by the receive end. This can improve the signal
quality.
2.3.4 Querying EAPE Objects
On the U2000, you can query the enhanced automatic power equalization (EAPE) objects that
are already created on the trail and enable or disable the EAPE adjustment.
2.3.5 Starting EAPE Adjustment
In the case of a WDM service configured with EAPE, when the OTU at the sink end detects the
signal degrade, an exceptional EAPE event is reported to and displayed on the U2000. This event
prompts the user to start EAPE adjustment so that the VOA at the source end finely tunes the
optical power at the transmit end. This can enhance the signal quality.
2.3.6 Deleting EAPE Objects
When the EAPE function on the trail is not required, you can manually delete the EAPE.

2.3.1 EAPE
The U2000 provides the enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium (EAPE) function. The
EAPE adjustment can be enabled to ensure that the receive-end signal quality of each channel
meets the preset requirement and that the services are available.

Function Description
In practice of WDM system operation, the optical power flatness of each channel, compared
with that during deployment commissioning, greatly changes due to fiber condition variation.
As a result, the quality of received signals does not meet the requirement. In this case, EAPE
adjustment can be enabled to ensure that the receive-end signal quality of each channel meets
the preset requirement and that the services are available.

Function Implementation
The procedure to implement the EAPE function is as follows:

2-138

1.

During deployment commissioning, manually adjust the optical power of each channel to
obtain signal quality that meet the requirement. This ensures that each channel normally
operates.

2.

During system operation, the OTU at the receive end detects the signal quality of each
channel.

3.

When the OTU at the receive end detects an alarm, if the optical power of the OTU at the
receive end does not cross the threshold, adjust the optical power attenuation ratio of the
corresponding channel according to the actual situation. This ensures that the receive-end
signal quality of each channel meets the preset requirement and that the services are
available.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Involved Boards
The service board and the SCC board are jointly used to achieve the EAPE function. This
function involves the following types of boards and ports:
l

OTU detection unit


Detects the receive-end signal quality of each channel and reports any EAPE unbalance
event detected.
The boards that support this function include the OTUs and line boards with the FEC
function.

Adjustment unit: It is the EAPE adjustment entity that adjusts the optical attenuation of
each channel. The boards that support this function include ROAM, WSM9, WSD9,
WSM5, WSD5, WSMD4, DWC, EDWC, V40, M40V, D40V, V48, VA2, VA1 and VA4.

Received signal selection unit


The system locates the point to be adjusted according to the current protection state of
the OLP or DCP board.
The boards that support this function include the OLP and DCP.

System control and communication unit


It is the system entity that carries out the EAPE function.
The boards that support this function include the SCC.
NOTE

For the EAPE function, EAPE protocol frames can be sent to each node as long as the physical
communication route is reachable. The EAPE protocol frames can be sent in modes such as the OSC and
ESC.

Networking Scenarios
The EAPE function can be applied in three typical scenarios.
EAPE application scenario 1 is with the basic configuration that only a trail with VOA unit
exists. Figure 2-56 shows the networking diagram of this application mode. The figure illustrates
only the unidirectional EAPE pair.
Figure 2-56 Scenario of the single VOA unit that takes the common OTU as the source

EAPE application scenario 2 is applicable to the dual fed and selective receiving OTU board.
Each of the two receive optical interfaces of the dual fed and selective receiving OTU has an
FEC module. Two trails with VOA units exist. Hence, in this networking mode, you need to
configure two EAPE pairs.Figure 2-57 shows the networking diagram of this application mode.
The figure illustrates only the unidirectional EAPE pair.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-139

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Figure 2-57 Scenario of the dual VOA units that take the dual-fed and selective-receiving OTUs
as the sources

EAPE application scenario 3 is applicable to the 5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s OTUs. In this
networking mode, the intra-board 1+1 protection needs to be configured. Only one EAPE pair
needs to be configured. When the sink OTU detects an anomaly, the system locates the VOA to
be adjusted according to the current services operating channel. Figure 2-58 shows the
networking diagram of this application mode. The figure considers the OLP board as an example
to illustrate only the unidirectional EAPE pair.
Figure 2-58 Scenario of the dual VOA units with the OLP protection units

Configuration Principle
The EAPE configuration principles are as follows:

2-140

When creating the EAPE, you must create the corresponding OCh trail firstly.

Based on the basic application scenario, you just need to specify the source OTU, sink OTU
and adjustment unit.

When the OTU is jointly used with the OLP or DCP board for networking, besides
specifying the source OTU and sink OTU, you also need to specify the OLP or DCP board
and the active and standby adjustment units. In this networking mode, the sink OLP or DCP
board and the sink OTU must be configured on one NE; the adjustment unit and the source
OTU must be configured on another NE.

The FEC type of the source and sink OTU must keep consistent. After EAPE is configured,
the FEC working mode of the OTU must not be changed; the FEC function of the OTU
must be enabled.

EAPE requires that the monitored path is a complete end-to-end wavelength without any
intermediate add or drop wavelength.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

An OCh trail with regenerating stations equals to two independent wavelengths and thus
need be configured with two EAPE pairs.

EAPE requires that the adjustment unit is configured in the transmit-end station and the
OTU detection unit is configured in the receive-end station.

An OCh trail with multiple sources and sinks does not support the EAPE function.

The uploading function is not supported, but the script importing and exporting function is
supported.

If the EAPE ID on the U2000 is inconsistent with that on the NE, you need to delete the
trail on the U2000 from the network layer, search for a new trail, and then query or create
EAPE objects. In this way, you can obtain the EAPE objects with consistent data between
the U2000 and the NE.

The adjustment board cannot be on the sink NE, and the selective receiving board cannot
be on the source NE.

The FEC mode of the source OTU and sink OTU should be the same.

2.3.2 Creating an OCh Trail


The U2000 supports creating OCh trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the source
and sink of a service, the U2000 can generate an OCh trail based on the searched server trail.
The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure and ensures
proper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible manner in
application scenarios (deployment or expansion).Before creating an EAPE pair, you should
create OCh trails. The EAPE function uses OCh trails to identify EAPE pairs. In the case of the
equipment with the dynamic optical cross-connection boards, you can create OCh trails manually
by using the trail management function of the U2000.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The OMS server trail must be searched out.

Context
The U2000 supports the function of creating a third-party wavelength service. A third-party
wavelength service is the OCh trail whose source or sink port is located on the multiplexing and
demultiplexing card or the add/drop multiplexing card, or whose source and sink ports are located
on such cards.
The U2000 does not support the ability to reuse discrete cross-connections.
The source and sink of an OCh trail are the ports at the line side of the OTU boards. The boards
that the trail passes should support dynamic optical cross-connection or should contain static
optical cross-connection. The boards that support the dynamic optical cross-connection are
classified by equipment domain as follows:
l

For the OptiX BWS 1600G and the OptiX BWS 1600A: WSM9, WSD9, WSM5, WSD5
and RMU9.

For the OptiX Metro 6100V1E: WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, and WSMD4.

For the OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 I/8800 II and OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A/8800 I(NA)/
8800 II(NA): WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, ROAM, WSMD4, 11RDU9, 11WSMD2, 12WSM9,
12WSD9, 13WSM9, 13WSD9, RDU6, WSM6.

Typical OCh networking scenarios are as follows:


Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-141

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

The typical scenario of non-protected OCh networking is as follows:


ONE2
O
T
U

OCh

ONE1

O
T
U

OCh
D40

OT U

FIU

FIU

ONE3

M40

OSC

FIU

WSM

WSD

OT U

FIU

OSC

OSC

OCh

fiber
oxc

The typical scenario of protected OCh networking is as follows:


ONE2

ONE1

F
I
U
O
T
U

ONE4

OSC

OSC

F
I
U

WSD

O
L
P

OSC

WSM

F
I
U

F
I
U

O
L
P

ONE3
F
I
U

OSC

F
I
U

WSM

WSD

O
T
U

F
I
U

F
I
U

OSC

OSC

OCh

fiber
oxc

Networking scenarios of creating a third-party wavelength service or an unterminated OCh trail


are as follows:

2-142

The following figures shows the third-party wavelength service whose source or sink is the
third-party equipment.

The following figures shows the third-party wavelength service whose source and sink are
the third-party equipment.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

l In the WDM service configuration window, you can view the resource allocation of the entire network in
an intuitive manner. When you create a service, available resources are automatically filtered and displayed
in the topology view. The available resources can be the server links of the OTS level or higher levels
between NEs.
l When you create a trail, Auto-Calculation is selected by default. Route calculation is triggered when you
specify the source, sink, or route constraints, or configure protection. If the route calculation fails, an error
message is displayed indicating the failure causes.
l If you clear the selection of Auto-Calculation, routes are not automatically calculated when you create a
trail. You can click to Calculate Route check the correctness of a route.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 Set the level and direction of the service.
Set the level to OCh and set the direction according to the specific networking.
Step 3 Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog box,
select the NE, card, and port.
TIP

l During the selection of source or sink in the NE Panel, when you move the cursor to a board, the
wavelength information of the board port is displayed.
l By default, if you already select one end (source or sink) of a trail and open the NE Panel to select
another end, the U2000 uses the board and port that have the same band and wavelength with priority.
l After you select the Enable third-party wavelength service port check box in the lower portion of
the window, you can create a trail whose source or sink is located on the multiplexing and
demultiplexing card (for example, M40 and D40) or the add/drop multiplexing card (for example, MR2
and WSM9), or whose source and sink ports are located on such cards. This trail is a third-party
wavelength service.
NOTE

l By default, the selected wavelength frequency is the current wavelength frequency of a (source) sink port.
You can select another proper wavelength frequency to meet the actual requirements.
l After the wavelength frequency for a source (sink) port is selected, the same wavelength frequency is selected
first for the corresponding sink (source) port. If the same wavelength frequency is not available for the
corresponding sink (source) port, the current wavelength frequency of the selected sink (source) port is
selected by default.

Step 4 Optional: Specify route constraints.


1.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Click the Explicit Link tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut
menu. In the Add Explicit Link window, you can search for the existing server trails and
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-143

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

set them as the explicit links of the trails to be created. You can select only the topmost
server trail.
2.

Click the Explicit Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut
menu. In the Add Explicit Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and set
them as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

3.

Click the Excluded Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut
menu. In the Add Excluded Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and set
them as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

4.

Specify the route channel. Click Specify Route Channel. In the Specify Route Channel
dialog box, you can modify the topmost server trail for the working route.

5.

Click Cancel Route Restriction to cancel the settings.


TIP

You can also specify route constraints in the topology view. When you create a service, the server links of
the OTS level or higher levels are automatically filtered and displayed in green in the topology view. After
routes are successfully calculated, the working route is displayed in blue between the source and sink NEs.
l Specify the explicit link. Click a server trail between the NEs to specify the explicit route. Click the
trail again to cancel the selection. Click a server link in green between the source and sink NEs. In the
dialog box that is displayed, specify the explicit server trails of all levels for the service. Click the trail
again to cancel the selection.
l Specify the explicit node. Click the Explicit Node tab. Double-click an NE to specify the explicit NE
of the route. This NE is shown as the icon. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.
l Specify the excluded node. Click the Excluded Node tab. You can specify the NE that the route of the
trail to be created is not allowed to pass through by double-clicking the NE. The selected NE is marked
with

sign. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

l Specify the route channel. Right-click the working route in blue and choose Trail Channel
Selection from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the topmost server trail
for the working route.
NOTE

After routes are successfully calculated, the list of the server routes for the trail to be created are displayed
in the lower portion of the topology view.
Choose Browse Relevant Trails from the shortcut menu to switch to the WDM Trail Management
window. In this window, you can view the details of the server trail of the trail to be created. The fiber does
not support this function.

Step 5 Configure general attributes. Click the General Attributes, set the general trail attributes,
including the name and ID.
Step 6 Optional: Before deploying the configuration of a service, you can perform the following
operations as required.
l

Click OPA Mode. In the OPA Mode dialog box, set the optical power adjustment mode
to Auto or Manual for the OCh trail to be created. For details, see 2.1.9.10 Modifying the
Optical Power Adjustment Mode of a WDM Trail.

Select the Activate the Trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after it
is created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on the
U2000.

If you select the Set Optical Power After Creation check box, after you create a trail
successfully, the Optical Power Management window is displayed for you to learn the
relevant optical power. For details of the function, see 2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Power
for the Trails.

Step 7 Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
----End
2-144

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Result
After refreshing the WDM Trail Management window, you can view the new WDM trail.
If the route calculation or route creation fails, an error message is displayed indicating the failure
causes. Click Analyze Route. In the Analyze Route dialog box, you can view the details of the
failure causes.

Postrequisite
If a fiber is connected to the source or sink of the new third-party wavelength service, the service
will be extended after a trail search.

2.3.3 Creating EAPE Objects


The U2000 supports configuring the enhanced automatic power equalization (EAPE) for a trail.
For a WDM service configured with the EAPE, the U2000 fine-tunes the optical power of the
transmit end according to signal quality detected by the receive end. This can improve the signal
quality.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

An OCh trail must be created or searched out.

Background Information
To create an EAPE pair correctly, the OCh trail must meet the following:
l

The source and sink board must be the OTU boards.

The board with the VOA unit must be configured on the trail.

If the protection is configured on the trail, the selective receiving unit at the sink must be
the OLP or DCP. In addition, the board with the VOA unit need be configured on the
protection trail.

EAPE requires that the adjustment unit is configured on the transmit-end station and the
OTU detection unit is configured on the receive-end station.

Source and sink OTU boards cannot be installed on the same NE.

The working and protection adjustment units can be configured in different slots on the
same NE.

When the corresponding EAPE pairs exist on an OCh trail, you cannot modify or deactivate
the trail.

In the case of the OCh path with the electrical REG, the OCh path is equivalent to two
independent wavelengths. Thus, you need configure two EAPE pairs on the OCh path.

EAPE can monitor only the trails on a complete end-to-end wavelength. Thus, no
wavelength can be added or dropped along the trail.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Trail > WDM Trail Management from the Main Menu. Select filter criteria according
to requirements.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-145

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 2 Select a desired OCh trail, click Maintenance, and select EAPE Management from the dropdown menu. The EAPE Management dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click New to create the EAPE management.

NOTE

l You need not configure the data of the EAPE objects. The U2000 automatically calculates and then applies
the data to the sink NE. The data of the EAPE objects is not displayed in the user interface. By default, the
adjustment board nearest to the source is used.
l If the OLP dual fed board is available, a power adjustment board for the protection trail is required.

----End

2.3.4 Querying EAPE Objects


On the U2000, you can query the enhanced automatic power equalization (EAPE) objects that
are already created on the trail and enable or disable the EAPE adjustment.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

An OCh trail must be created or searched out.

The EAPE must be created correctly.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu. Select filter criteria
according to requirements.
Step 2 Select a desired OCh trail, click Maintenance, and select EAPE Management from the dropdown menu. The EAPE Management dialog box is displayed.
2-146

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 3 Click Query to query the EAPE.

----End

2.3.5 Starting EAPE Adjustment


In the case of a WDM service configured with EAPE, when the OTU at the sink end detects the
signal degrade, an exceptional EAPE event is reported to and displayed on the U2000. This event
prompts the user to start EAPE adjustment so that the VOA at the source end finely tunes the
optical power at the transmit end. This can enhance the signal quality.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The EAPE must be created.

The 15-min performance monitoring must be started on the sink NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu. Select filter criteria
according to requirements.
Step 2 Select a desired OCh trail, click Maintenance , and select EAPE Management from the dropdown menu. The EAPE Management dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 If the Status is Can Be Adjusted, click Start Adjustment to start adjusting the EAPE.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-147

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management


NOTE

l When the adjustment is finished, Status changes to Adjustment Not Required.


l Status indicates the current adjustment status of the EAPE. The status can be Adjustment Not
Required, Can Be Adjusted, Being Adjusted, Unequalized, or Not Specified. Unequalized
indicates that the optical power received by the sink end exceeds the threshold or the received signal
degrades.
If the WDM service configured with EAPE is a bidirectional service, after starting the EAPE adjustment
of the OCh trail that load the reverse direction service, repeat Step 1 to 3 to start the EAPE adjustment of
the OCh trail that load the positive direction service.

----End

2.3.6 Deleting EAPE Objects


When the EAPE function on the trail is not required, you can manually delete the EAPE.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The EAPE must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu. Select filter criteria
according to requirements.
Step 2 Select an OCh trail whose EAPE that you want to delete, click Maintenance, and select EAPE
Management from the drop-down menu. The EAPE Management dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click Delete to delete the EAPE objects on the trail.
Step 4 Optional: In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > EAPE
Management from the Function Tree, select the EAPE objects that you want to delete, click
delete.
NOTE

When the OCh trail whose EAPE that you want to delete is not found in the trail management interface,
you can perform this step to delete the EAPE objects.

----End

2.4 Managing Alarms on WDM Trails


You can use the U2000 function of end-to-end trail management to manage the alarms generated
on WDM trails at the network layer.
2.4.1 Viewing Current Alarms of a WDM Trail
By querying current alarms of a WDM trail, you can learn about faults on this trail to perform
maintenance in a timely and effective manner.
2.4.2 Viewing History Alarms of a WDM Trail
By querying history alarms of a WDM trail, you can learn about history faults on this trail and
provide reference for maintenance of current faults.
2.4.3 Managing Networkwide WDM Alarm Trails in Real Time
2-148

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

The U2000 can manage the networkwide WDM alarm trails in real time. It manages all the
WDM trails that have current alarms. If an alarm ends, the related trail is automatically removed
from the user interface.
2.4.4 Analyzing WDM alarm correlation
After a fault occurs, the NE may report a lot of alarms. By analyzing the alarm correlation, you
can quickly locate the fault to the root alarm.

2.4.1 Viewing Current Alarms of a WDM Trail


By querying current alarms of a WDM trail, you can learn about faults on this trail to perform
maintenance in a timely and effective manner.

Prerequisite
l

To view the alarms, You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or
higher. To acknowledge, check, synchronize and delete alarms, You must be an NM user
with "network operator" authority or higher.

The WDM trail must be created.

Context
TIP

On the Main Topology, expand the link between two NEs, right-click a certain trail level, such as Client,
and choose Browse Current Alarm from the shortcut menu. You can view the current alarms of all the
Client trails that traverse the two NEs.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Optional: Select a trail that contained alarm, right-click in the Transmission Media Layer
Route or Signal Flow Diagram window, and choose Display Alarm from the shortcut menu.
If the NEs have alarms, each of the NE icons is indicated with a specific alarm color. When you
hold the cursor on any one of the NE icons, alarm information of the NE is displayed.
Step 4 Select one or several desired trails , click Alarm, and choose Current Alarm from the dropdown menu. The current alarms on this trail are displayed in the window.
NOTE

Click an alarm. The details of the alarm and the recommended handling are displayed in the pane below.

Step 5 Optional: To display the latest alarms, check the Display latest alarms check box.
Step 6 Optional: To check the alarms, select one or more alarms. Right-click alarms and choose Check
Alarms.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-149

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management


NOTE

When you check the alarm, you are comparing one or more uncleared alarms on the U2000 with those on
the NE. If the alarm exists as a current alarm in the NE, it means that the alarm information remains
unchanged on the U2000. If the alarm does not exist in the NE, the alarm is cleared on the U2000.

Step 7 Optional: To acknowledge the alarms, select one or more alarms and click Acknowledge. In
the Acknowledge Alarms dialog box displayed, click Yes.
NOTE

Acknowledged and cleared alarms automatically change to history alarms.

Step 8 Optional: To delete the alarms, select one or more alarms and click Delete. In the Delete the
Alarms dialog box displayed, click Yes.
Step 9 Optional: To view the trails, customers, and protection subnets that are affected by an alarm,
you can select one alarm, right-click, and choose the required menu item, for example,
Protection Subnet.
----End

2.4.2 Viewing History Alarms of a WDM Trail


By querying history alarms of a WDM trail, you can learn about history faults on this trail and
provide reference for maintenance of current faults.

Prerequisite
l

To view the alarms, You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or
higher. To acknowledge, check, synchronize and delete alarms, You must be an NM user
with "network operator" authority or higher.

The WDM trail must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a desired trail, click Alarm, and choose History Alarm from the drop-down menu.
The history alarms on this trail are displayed in the window.
Step 4 Learn about the history alarms reported on this trail to provide reference for maintenance of
current faults.
----End

2-150

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.4.3 Managing Networkwide WDM Alarm Trails in Real Time


The U2000 can manage the networkwide WDM alarm trails in real time. It manages all the
WDM trails that have current alarms. If an alarm ends, the related trail is automatically removed
from the user interface.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Fault > Service Monitoring > Real-Time Faulty WDM Trail Management from the
Main Menu.
Step 2 Set the trail filter criteria and click Filter All.
Step 3 In the Alarm Affected WDM Trails window displayed, the alarm affected WDM trails that
meet the criteria are displayed.
Step 4 Optional: Right-click the title of a parameter column and set the trail attributes to be displayed.
Step 5 Choose Alarm. Select the corresponding command from the drop-down menu to query or set
the alarm data of each trail.
Step 6 Optional: To query the performance data of a trail, click Performance > Browse
Performance.
Step 7 Optional: To print the trail information, click Print. To save the trail information, click Save
As.
----End

2.4.4 Analyzing WDM alarm correlation


After a fault occurs, the NE may report a lot of alarms. By analyzing the alarm correlation, you
can quickly locate the fault to the root alarm.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Fault > Correlation Analysis > Trail Alarm Correlation Rules from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Click Create in the Alarm Correlation Rules dialog box, a rule of alarm correlation is created.
NOTE

You can also modify the existed alarm correlation rules.

Step 3 Set the Alarm1, Alarm2, Conditions and Action of the new rule.
NOTE

When you select Enable Automatic Correlation Analysis, dynamic analysis of the root alarm is adopted.
When you deselect Enable Automatic Correlation Analysis, static analysis of the root alarm is adopted.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-151

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Step 4 Click Apply.


Step 5 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.
Step 6 Click Close in the Alarm Correlation Rules dialog box.
Step 7 Choose Fault > Browse Alarm List from the Main Menu.
Step 8 In the Filter dialog box that is displayed, set the filtering criteria, and click OK.
Step 9 Optional: If use the dynamically analyzing trail root alarms, right-click a root alarm and choose
correlative alarms from the shortcut menu to display the correlative alarms suppressed by this
root alarm.
Step 10 Optional: If use the static analyzing trail root alarms, choose Fault > Correlation Analysis >
Analyze Trail Alarm Correlation from the Main Menu.
1.

Click OK in the Correlation Analysis for Current Alarm dialog box.

2.

Click OK in the Confirm dialog box, the root alarm informations are displays in the Browse
Root Alarm.

----End

2.5 Managing the Performance of WDM Trails


You can use the network layer function of the U2000 to perform end-to-end performance
management on WDM trails.
2.5.1 Viewing Current Performance Data of WDM Trails
You can find out the running status of the service carried by the WDM trails by querying the
performance data.
2.5.2 Viewing History Performance Data of WDM Trails
By querying the history performance data of a WDM trail, you can learn about the running status
of the services carried on the trail in a specific period in the past and provide reference for
analyzing the current performance of this trail.
2.5.3 Viewing UAT of WDM Trails
You can view performance UAT of WDM trails to know the UAT events of the WDM trails.
2.5.4 Viewing Performance Threshold-Crossing Records of WDM Trails
You can view performance threshold-crossing record of WDM trails to know the performance
threshold-crossing events of the WDM trails.
2.5.5 Viewing Ethernet Performance of WDM Trails
You can view ethernet performance of WDM trails to know the RMON performance of the
whole trails.
2.5.6 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an WDM Trail
Performance monitoring keeps a detailed record of the performance of services over a trail,
helping the maintenance engineer to monitor and analyze the states of services.
2.5.7 Setting WDM Trail Performance Threshold
In this user interface, you can set performance thresholds based on a trail. Specifically, you can
set the corresponding performance thresholds for the performance events and performance types
on the source and sink of a trail.
2-152

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.5.1 Viewing Current Performance Data of WDM Trails


You can find out the running status of the service carried by the WDM trails by querying the
performance data.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

The WDM trail must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail, click Performance and select Browse Performance from the drop-down list.
Step 4 Click the 15-Minute Current Performance or 24-Hour Current Performance tab and query
the latest 15-minute or 24-hour performance data of the trail. Perform the maintenance operation
according to the current performance events.
Step 5 Optional: To browse the performance events on the NEs that the trail traverses, select the
Display all monitored objects check box.
NOTE

If this check box is selected, the performance events of the source, sink, and intermediate nodes that a trail
traverse are displayed. If this check box is cleared, the performance events of only the source and sink
nodes of a trail are displayed.

Step 6 Optional: Click Filter. In the Filter dialog box, set the filter criteria and click OK. The qualified
performance events are displayed.
----End

2.5.2 Viewing History Performance Data of WDM Trails


By querying the history performance data of a WDM trail, you can learn about the running status
of the services carried on the trail in a specific period in the past and provide reference for
analyzing the current performance of this trail.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

The WDM trail must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-153

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a desired trail, click Performance and select Browse Performance from the drop-down
list.
Step 4 Click the 15-Minute History Performance or 24-Hour History Performance tab and view
the history performance data.
Step 5 Optional: To browse the performance events on the NEs that the trail traverses, select the
Display all monitored objects check box.
NOTE

If this check box is selected, the performance events of the source, sink, and intermediate nodes that a trail
traverse are displayed. If this check box is cleared, the performance events of only the source and sink
nodes of a trail are displayed.

Step 6 Optional: Click Filter. In the Filter dialog box, set the filter criteria and click OK. The qualified
performance events are displayed.
Step 7 Optional: Click Graph. In the displayed window, select Performance Event and Monitor
Object. Click

and then click Show to view the graphic display.

NOTE

l By displaying data in a graph, you can clearly learn the performance change trend in a certain period.
l Applies to the performance events related to the optical power only.

----End

2.5.3 Viewing UAT of WDM Trails


You can view performance UAT of WDM trails to know the UAT events of the WDM trails.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

The WDM trail must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select one or several trails, click Performance, choose Browse Performance.
2-154

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 4 click UAT tab to view the UAT events of the WDM trails.
Step 5 Optional: To browse the performance events on the NEs that the trail traverses, select the
Display all monitored objects check box.
NOTE

If this check box is selected, the performance events of the source, sink, and intermediate nodes that a trail
traverse are displayed. If this check box is cleared, the performance events of only the source and sink
nodes of a trail are displayed.

Step 6 Optional: Click Filter. In the Filter dialog box, set the filter criteria and click OK. The qualified
performance events are displayed.
----End

2.5.4 Viewing Performance Threshold-Crossing Records of WDM


Trails
You can view performance threshold-crossing record of WDM trails to know the performance
threshold-crossing events of the WDM trails.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

The WDM trail must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select one or several trails, click Performance, choose Browse Performance.
Step 4 Click performance threshold-crossing record tab to view the performance threshold-crossing
events of the WDM trails.
Step 5 Optional: To browse the performance events on the NEs that the trail traverses, select the
Display all monitored objects check box.
NOTE

If this check box is selected, the performance events of the source, sink, and intermediate nodes that a trail
traverse are displayed. If this check box is cleared, the performance events of only the source and sink
nodes of a trail are displayed.

Step 6 Optional: Click Filter. In the Filter dialog box, set the filter criteria and click OK. The qualified
performance events are displayed.
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-155

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.5.5 Viewing Ethernet Performance of WDM Trails


You can view ethernet performance of WDM trails to know the RMON performance of the
whole trails.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

The WDM client trail must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select one or several trails, Click Performance, choose Ethernet Performance.
, then click Graph, and then select all the object and
Step 4 Optional: Select a trail, click
select Performance Event. click draw. The diagram shows the changes in a performance event
of a certain object at different time.
----End

2.5.6 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an WDM Trail


Performance monitoring keeps a detailed record of the performance of services over a trail,
helping the maintenance engineer to monitor and analyze the states of services.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

The WDM trail must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail. Click Performance and choose Performance Parameter from the drop-down
menu.
2-156

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 4 In the Performance Parameter dialog box displayed, select an object, and set the monitoring
status and auto reporting status.
Step 5 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.
----End

2.5.7 Setting WDM Trail Performance Threshold


In this user interface, you can set performance thresholds based on a trail. Specifically, you can
set the corresponding performance thresholds for the performance events and performance types
on the source and sink of a trail.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

The trail must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
l

If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental
Filter.

If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select one or more trails. Click Performance and choose Performance Threshold from the
drop-down menu.
Step 4 In the Performance Threshold window, double-click Threshold Value to change the
performance threshold value.
Step 5 Click Apply, in the Operation Result window, click Close.
Step 6 Click Cancel to exit the Performance Threshold window.
----End

2.6 Configuring Board Parameters


When configuring WDM services, you need to configure different boards in the network. The
various types of boards and the procedure for configuring the board parameters are described
here.
2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board
2.6.2 Configuring the Service Mode
If services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of the
board.
2.6.3 Service Type
This topic describes the service types that are supported in the WDM service configuration.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-157

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.6.4 Configuring the Service Type


The services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM interface
of the board is the same as the actual service type.
2.6.5 Modifying Port
The client-side port and line-side ports of the OTU board in the NG WDM can be a color port
or a colorless port. Set the port type based on the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical
module used in the equipment. of the OTU board can be a color port or a colorless port. Set the
port type based on the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical module used in the equipment.
2.6.6 Creating Cross-Connections
By creating a normal cross-connection, you can create the intra-board or inter-board route for a
single service.
2.6.7 Service Mode (WDM Interface)
2.6.8 Service Type (WDM Interface)
2.6.9 GUI Parameter Description: WDM Cross-Connection Configuration
In this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.

2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board


2.6.1.1 About the Working Modes
This section describes the board working mode and port working mode. A specific service signal
flow of a board is available when the board working mode and port working mode are set to
specific values.
2.6.1.2 Configuration Rules of the 52TOM board
This section describes the rules for configuring the 52TOM board.
2.6.1.3 Configuring the Working Mode of the 52TOM Board
Before using the 52TOM board, you need to configure the board working mode and port working
mode for the 52TOM board.
2.6.1.4 Configuring the Working Mode of the LQM2 board
The default working mode of the LQM2 board is 2LQM Mode. When the working mode is
switched to AP8 Mode, you need to configure the board and add the IN2/OUT2 optical interface
according to this section.
2.6.1.5 Configuring the Working Modes of Ordinary OTUs
Before you use OTU boards such as the 11TOM, you need to configure the working modes of
the boards.

2.6.1.1 About the Working Modes


This section describes the board working mode and port working mode. A specific service signal
flow of a board is available when the board working mode and port working mode are set to
specific values.

Board Working mode


The U2000 supports four board working modes: NS1 Mode, TQM Mode, Cascading, and
Non-Cascading.
The 12LQMS board supports NS1 Mode and TQM Mode.
2-158

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

In NS1 Mode, the 12LQMS board functions as a line board that performs the mutual
conversion between the ODUk electrical signals and the optical signals at a WDM systemcompliant standard wavelength.

In TQM Mode, the 12LQMS board functions as a tributary-line board that performs the
mutual conversion between the client-side signals and the optical signals at a WDM systemcompliant standard wavelength.

The 11TOM and 52TOM boards support the Cascading and Non-Cascading modes.
l

In Cascading mode, a maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) Any services can be
input to the 11TOM or 52TOM board through the client side, and then are multiplexed into
different timeslots of one or two ODU0 services or one ODU1 service.

In Non-Cascading mode, a maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) Any services can
be input to the 11TOM or 52TOM board through the SFP module on the client side, and
then are multiplexed into different timeslots of one to eight ODU0 services or one to four
ODU1 services.
NOTE

A specific service signal flow of the 52TOM board is available only when both the board working mode and
port working mode are set to specific values.

Port Working Mode


The 52TOM board should be set to the cascading or non-cascading mode. In addition, application
scenarios such as the ODU0 or ODU1 mapping mode and tributary or tributary-line mode of the
ports on the board should be set. As shown in Table 2-32, the 52TOM board supports 14 working
modes.
Table 2-32 Mapping between the working modes and signal flows of the 52TOM board
Board Working mode

Cascading

Non-Cascading

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Port Working Mode

Signal Flow

ODU0 Tributary Mode

Any->ODU0[->ODU1]

ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode

Any->ODU0->ODU1>OTU1

ODU1 Tributary Mode

Any->ODU1

ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode

Any->ODU1->OTU1

NONE Mode

ODU0 Tributary Mode

Any->ODU0[->ODU1]

ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode

Any->ODU0->ODU1>OTU1

Application 1 of ODU1
Tributary Mode

OTU1/Any->ODU1

Application 2 of ODU1
Tributary Mode

OTU1->ODU1->ODU0

Application 3 of ODU1
Tributary Mode

OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-159

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Board Working mode

Port Working Mode

Signal Flow

Application 4 of ODU1
Tributary Mode

OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1

Application 1 of ODU1
Tributary-Line Mode

OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1

Application 2 of ODU1
Tributary-Line Mode

OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1

NONE Mode

NOTE

[->**]: indicates that "**" is optional. For example, in non-cascading ODU0 tributary mode, there are
two service signal flows: Any->ODU0 and Any->ODU0->ODU1.
NONE Mode: indicates that the resources at this port are not used and are released to other ports.

2.6.1.2 Configuration Rules of the 52TOM board


This section describes the rules for configuring the 52TOM board.
The rules for configuring the 52TOM board are as follows:
l

In non-cascading board working mode, the ports on the board can be set to different port
working modes.

The OptiX OSN 8800 series does not support distributed cross-connection.

In tributary-line mode, the ODU1 service does not support centralized cross-connection.

The 52TOM board can groom a maximum of six Any services through the backplane. In
the OptiX OSN 6800/3800, the 52TOM board can groom Any services on the opposite
board but cannot groom Any services throughout the full-mesh network. Particularly, in
the OptiX OSN 3800, inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the 52TOM and
52NS2 boards, if required, should be configured in such a manner that the ClientLP3.1 port
on the 52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1.3 port on the 52NS2 board, the
ClientLP5.1 port on the 52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1.2 port on the
52NS2 board, and the rest may be deduced by analogy.

The OptiX OSN 6800/3800 cannot groom the ODU0 service and thus does not support the
following port working mode application scenarios:
Non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode application scenario 2 (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
Non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode application scenario 3 (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0)

The OptiX OSN 8800 series does not support the following port working mode application
scenario:
Non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode application scenario 4 (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1)

2-160

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.6.1.3 Configuring the Working Mode of the 52TOM Board


Before using the 52TOM board, you need to configure the board working mode and port working
mode for the 52TOM board.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The 52TOM board must be created.
No cross-connection exists on the board when the board-level mode switching occurs on the
board.
No logical fiber exists on the optical interface when the board-level mode switching occurs on
the board.

Context
You can set the Cascading or Non-Cascading mode for the 11TOM and 52TOM boards.
l

When the Cascading mode is selected, a maximum of eight channels of Any services of
multiple rates (<2.5 Gbit/s) are accessed through the SFP module from the client side of
the board. Then, the multiple channels of client-side signals are multiplexed to different
timeslots of the one-channel or two-channel ODU0 or the one-channel ODU1.

When the Non-Cascading mode is selected, a maximum of eight channels of Any services
of multiple rates (<2.5 Gbit/s) are accessed through the SFP module from the client side of
the board. Then, the multiple channels of client-side signals are multiplexed to different
timeslots of the one-channel (maximumly eight-channel) ODU0 or the one-channel
(maximumly four-channel) ODU1.
NOTE

In the case of a 52TOM board, you need to set the cascading or non-cascading mode for the board, and the
application mode, such as the ODU0 mapping, ODU1 mapping, tributary mode, and tributary-line mode,
for each port. In this way, different signal flows can be realized. There are 14 types of working modes for
the 52TOM boards.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a 52TOM board, and choose Configuration > Working Mode from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 In the Board Working Mode pane, set Board Working Mode to Cascading or NonCascading.
Step 3 In the Port Working Mode pane, select the desired optical interface. Double-click the Port
Working Mode field and select the corresponding mode from the drop-down list.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End

2.6.1.4 Configuring the Working Mode of the LQM2 board


The default working mode of the LQM2 board is 2LQM Mode. When the working mode is
switched to AP8 Mode, you need to configure the board and add the IN2/OUT2 optical interface
according to this section.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-161

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The physical and logical LQM2 board must be configured.

Background Information
This section describes how to configure the LQM2 board and add an optical interface when the
working mode of the board is switched from 2LQM Mode to AP8 Mode. When the working
mode of the board is switched from AP8 Mode to 2LQM Mode, the configuration of the board
is similar except that you do not need to add the IN2/OUT2 optical interface.

Procedure
Step 1 Delete the cross-connections on the LQM2 board:
1.

In the NE Explorer, click the LQM2 board and choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management from the Function Tree. Click Query. The Working cross-connection field
displays all the working cross-connections on the LQM2 board.

2.

Select all the working cross-connections on the LQM2 board, and then click Deactivate.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

3.

A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

4.

Click Delete. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

5.

A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 2 Delete the service type on the LQM2 board:


1.

In the NE Explorer, select the LQM2 board and then choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

On the right of the user interface, select By Board/Port (Channel), and select Channel
from the drop-down list. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Service Type of optical
interface 3 to optical interface 10 to None, and then click Apply.

3.

A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 3 Change the working mode of the LQM2 board:

2-162

1.

Select By Function and then choose Board Mode from the drop-down menu.

2.

Set Board Mode to AP8 Mode, and then click Apply.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 4 Add the IN2/OUT2 optical interface of the LQM2 board:


1.

In the NE Explorer, right-click the LQM2 board and then choose Path View. The Path
View window is displayed.

2.

Right-click the blank space on the right of the Path View window, and then choose Add
Port.

3.

The Add Port dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

Step 5 Optional: In the NE Explorer, select the LQM2 board and then choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree. On the right of the user interface, select By Board/Port
(Channel). On the Basic Attributes tab page, click Query.
----End

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-163

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2.6.1.5 Configuring the Working Modes of Ordinary OTUs


Before you use OTU boards such as the 11TOM, you need to configure the working modes of
the boards.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The necessary OTU boards must be created.
Applies to the 11TOM 12LQMS and 12ND2 boards.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), Select Board from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the desired port on the board, and then double-click Board Mode to choose the desired
port working mode from the drop-down list.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End

2.6.2 Configuring the Service Mode


If services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of the
board.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Applicable boards: 11TOM, 12LQMD, 12LQMS, 12TQM, 13LQM, and 52TOM.

Precautions

CAUTION
Modifying the service mode interrupts the existing services.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), and then choose Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the Basic Attributes tab, and then select the desired optical interface. Double-click the
Service Mode field, and then choose the desired service mode from the drop-down list.
2-164

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Step 4 Click Apply.


----End

2.6.3 Service Type


This topic describes the service types that are supported in the WDM service configuration.

Access Service
The OptiX OSN 1800, OptiX OSN 3800, OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 8800 series support
multiple access services, such as the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) service, the
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) service, Ethernet service, Storage Area Network (SAN)
service, Optical Transport Network (OTN) service, and video service.
Table 2-33 lists the access services that the OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 6800 support.
Table 2-33 Service access function
Service Category

Service Type

Reference Standard

SDH service, POS


service, ATM service

STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64,


STM-256

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.691
ITU-T G.957
ITU-T G.693

SONET service

OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768

GR-253-CORE
GR-1377-CORE
ANSI T1.105

Ethernet service

FE, GE, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN

IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae

SAN service

OTN service

ESCON, FICON, FICON Express, FC50,


FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800, FC1200

ANSI X3.296

OTU1, OTU2, OTU3

ITU-T G.709

ANSI X3.303

ITU-T G.959.1
Video service and
others

HDTV, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, SDI,


FDDI

EN 50083-9
SMPTE 292M
SMPTE 259M

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-165

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Service Category

Service Type

Reference Standard

FE: Fast Ethernet


GE: Gigabit Ethernet
ESCON: Enterprise systems connection
FICON: Fiber connection
FC: Fiber channel
HDTV: High definition TV
DVB-ASI: Digital video broadcasting-asynchronous serial interface
DVB-SDI: Digital video broadcasting-serial digital interface
SDI: Serial digital interface
FDDI: Fiber distributed data interface

Table 2-34 lists the access services that the OptiX OSN 8800 series supports.
Table 2-34 Service access function
Service Category

Service Type

Reference Standard

SDH service, POS


service, ATM
service

STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64,


STM-256

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.691
ITU-T G.957
ITU-T G.693

SONET service

OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768

GR-253-CORE
GR-1377-CORE
ANSI T1.105

Ethernet service

FE, GE, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN

IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae

SAN service

OTN service

ESCON, FICON, FICON Express,


FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800,
FC1200

ANSI X3.296

OTU1, OTU2, OTU3, OTU2e

ITU-T G.709

ANSI X3.303

ITU-T G.959.1
Video service and
others

HDTV, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, SDI,


FDDI

EN 50083-9
SMPTE 292M
SMPTE 259M

2-166

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Service Category

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Service Type

Reference Standard

FE: Fast Ethernet


GE: Gigabit Ethernet
ESCON: Enterprise systems connection
FICON: Fiber connection
FC: Fiber channel
HDTV: High definition TV
DVB-ASI: Digital video broadcasting-asynchronous serial interface
DVB-SDI: Digital video broadcasting-serial digital interface
SDI: Serial digital interface
FDDI: Fiber distributed data interface

Table 2-35 lists the access services that the OptiX OSN 1800 supports.
Table 2-35 Types of Service Access
Classification

Reference Standard

Service Type

Standard SDH
service

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.691
ITU-T G.957

STM-64 standard or
concatenation service
STM-16 standard or
concatenation service
STM-4 standard or concatenation
service
STM-1 standard service

Standard SONET
service

GR-253-CORE
GR-1377-CORE
ANSI T1.105

OC-192 standard or
concatenation service
OC-48 standard or concatenation
service
OC-12 standard or concatenation
service
OC-3 standard service

Ethernet service

IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae

10 GE LAN service
10 GE WAN service
Gigabit Ethernet (GE) service
Fast Ethernet (FE) service

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-167

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Classification

Reference Standard

Service Type

SAN service

ANSI X3.296

FC100 service

ANSI X3.303

FC400 service
FICON(Fiber Connection)
service
FC200 service
FICON Express service
ESCON(Enterprise Systems
Connection) service

OTN servicea

GPON service

ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.959.1

OTU2/OTU2v service

G.984

OLT (Optical Line Terminal) side


signal

OTU1 service

ONU (Optical Network Unit) side


signal
GPON signal
EPON service

IEEE802.3ah

OLT (Optical Line Terminal) side


signal
ONU (Optical Network Unit) side
signal

DVB-ASI(Digital
Video Broadcasting
-Asynchronous
Serial Interface)
service

EN 50083-9

HDTV(High
Definition TV)
service

SMPTE 292M

Fiber Distributed
Data Interface
(FDDI) service

EN 50083-9

Other 42 Mbit/s to
2.67 Gbit/s service

SMPTE 259M

a: Transponder features transparent transmission.


b: TMUX indicates low speed service convergence transmission.
c: OTU1 and OTU2 indicate the optical channel transport unit defined by the ITU-T G.709.
d: REG indicates bidirectional regeneration of service.

2-168

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

The PON services that can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN 1800 can be GPON or EPON.
In the case of GPON and EPON services, no service configuration needs to be made on the board by using
the network management system.

Table 2-36 lists the access services that the OptiX BWS 1600G supports.
Table 2-36 Service types supported by the system
Classification

Service Types

Service Transmission Mode

Standard SDH service

STM-256 standard service

Transponder b: 1xSTM-256->OTU3
IMUX c: 1xSTM-256->4xOTU2

STM-64 standard or
concatenation service

Transponder: 1xSTM-64->OTU2

STM-16 standard or
concatenation service

Transponder: 1xSTM-16-->
STM-16/OTU1
TMUX d: 4xSTM-16--> 1x
OTU2

STM-4 standard or
concatenation service

Transponder: 1xSTM-4--> 1x
STM-4
TMUX: 4xSTM-4->1xSTM-16/OTU1

STM-1 standard service

Transponder: 1xSTM-1-->
1xSTM-1
TMUX: 4xSTM-1-->1xOTU1

Standard SONET
service

OC-768 standard service

Transponder b: 1xOC-768->OTU3
IMUX c: 1xOC-768-->4xOTU2

OC-192 standard or
concatenation service

Transponder: 1xOC-192->OTU2

OC-48 standard or
concatenation service

Transponder: 1xOC-48-->
OC-48/OTU1
TMUX d: 4xOC-48--> 1x
OTU2

OC-12 standard or
concatenation service

Transponder: 1xOC-12-->
1xOC-12
TMUX: 4xOC-12-->1xOTU1

OC-3 standard service

Transponder: 1xOC-3-->
1xOC-3
TMUX: 4xOC-3-->1xOC-48/
OTU1

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-169

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Classification

Service Types

Service Transmission Mode

OTN service a

OTU1 service

Transponder: 1xOTU1-->
1xOTU1
TMUX: 4xOTU1--> 1xOTU2

FC (Fiber Channel)
service

OTU2 service

Transponder: 1xOTU2-->
1xOTU2

FC100 service

TMUX: 8xFC100 --> 1xOTU2


TMUX: 2xFC100 -->
1xSTM-16
Transponder: 1xFC100 -->
1xFC100

FC200 service

TMUX: 4xFC200 --> 1xOTU2


Transponder: 1xFC200 -->
1xFC200

POS service

FC400 service

TMUX: 2xFC400 --> 1xOTU2

FC 10G service

Transponder: 1xFC 10G -->


1xOTU2

Packet Over SDH/SONET


service

Transponder: 1xPOS -->


1xPOS
TMUX: 4x POS--> 1xOTU1

Ethernet service

Gigabit Ethernet (GE) service

TMUX: 2xGE--> 1xSTM-16/


OTU1
TMUX: 8xGE--> 1xOTU2
TMUX: 4xFC200/FC100/GE-> 1xOTU2

Any 34 Mbit/s-2.7
Gbit/s service

10 GE service

Transponder: 1x 10GE -->


1xOTU2

Enterprise Systems Connection


(ESCON) service

TMUX: 4 x 100 Mbit/s - 2.5


Gbit/s service signals in any
protocol --> 1 x OTU1
Transponder: transparent
transmission of 100 Mbit/s - 2.5
Gbit/s service signals in any
protocol

Fiber Channel (FC) service


Fiber Connection (FICON)
service
Fiber Distributed Data Interface
(FDDI) service
PDH (34M/45M/140M) service
Fast Ethernet (FE)
Digital Video Broadcasting Asynchronous Serial Interface
(DVB-ASI)

2-170

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Classification

Service Types

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Service Transmission Mode

a: OTU1 and OTU2 indicate the optical channel transport unit defined by the ITU-T G.709.
b: Transponder features transparent transmission.
c: IMUX indicates inverse multiplexing transmission.
d: TMUX indicates low speed service convergence transmission.

2.6.4 Configuring the Service Type


The services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM interface
of the board is the same as the actual service type.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Precautions

CAUTION
Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 In the Basic Attributes tab, select the desired optical interface. Double-click the Service
Type field and select the required service type.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-171

2 End-to-End WDM Management

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Step 4 Click Apply.


Step 5 Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Step 6 Click Close.
----End

2.6.5 Modifying Port


The client-side port and line-side ports of the OTU board in the NG WDM can be a color port
or a colorless port. Set the port type based on the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical
module used in the equipment. of the OTU board can be a color port or a colorless port. Set the
port type based on the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical module used in the equipment.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The LSX/LSXR and LSXL/LSXLR boards do not support this function.

Background Information
NOTE

During the creation of OTU boards, the client-side port is added by default. The port type is the client-side
black and white optical port by default.

The following equipment is supported: OptiX OSN 8800 T32, OptiX OSN 8800 T64, OptiX
OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.
During the creation of OTU boards, the client-side port is added by default. The port type is the
client-side colorless optical port by default.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the port for which you want to modify the port type and choose Modify Port from
the shortcut menu. The Modify Port dialog box is displayed. Set Type and click OK to apply
the configuration.

2-172

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

If you need to modify Type to Line Side Color Optical Port, you must first delete the port, and then add
the port. Otherwise the port cannot be modified successfully. GETH, you must first delete the port, and
then add the port. Otherwise the port cannot be modified successfully.

Step 2 Optional: In Path View, right-click the desired port, and click Delete Port.
Step 3 Optional: In Path View, right-click a blank space and select Add Port. In the Add Port dialog
box displayed, set the Type of the port. Click OK to apply the configuration.
----End

Parameters
Table 2-37 lists the related parameters of the client-side port.
Table 2-37 Parameters of the Client-Side Port
Field

Value

Description

Port

For example: 6

Displays the number of the client-side port.

Type

Client Side Black Specifies the type of the port. For example:
and White
l Client Side Black and White Optical Port: There
Optical Port,
is no concept of wavelength for optical ports. The
Client Side Color
actual wavelength is a invalid value by default.
Optical Port,
l Client Side Color Optical Port: Wavelengths
Electrical Port,
should be configured and the configuration of
Line Side Black
optical layer services can be performed.
and White
Optical Port,
Line Side Color
Optical Port

Level

l For Client
Side Black
and White
Optical Port
and Client
Side Color
Optical Port:
FE,GE
GETH

Sets level for the client side optical port.

l For
Electrical
Port: FE,
GEGETH

2.6.6 Creating Cross-Connections


By creating a normal cross-connection, you can create the intra-board or inter-board route for a
single service.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-173

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
For cross-connect slot limitations, see Overview.

CAUTION
When configuring the electrical cross-connection for a service, you must make sure that the
WDM-side optical channel numbers at the transmit and receive ends of the service in a direction
must be the same. Otherwise, the service fails.

Procedure
Step 1 When configuring the cross-connection services, first configure the service type of the WDM
interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see 2.6.4 Configuring the Service
Type.
Step 2 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management
from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click New and the Create CrossConnection Service dialog box is displayed. For parameter descriptions, see 2.6.9 GUI
Parameter Description: WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.
Step 4 Select corresponding values for Level and Service Type and set other parameters for the service.

2-174

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

NOTE

In the case of the LQM2 board on the OptiX OSN 1800, the available LP optical interface varies according
to the board mode.
l When Board Mode is AP8 Mode, only optical interface 201(LP1/LP1) can be selected on the
U2000.
l When Board Mode is 2LQM Mode, optical interface 201(LP1/LP1) or 202(LP2/LP2) can be selected
on the U2000. In addition, a pair of source and sink optical interfaces can be formed between 201(LP1/
LP1) and 3(RX1/TX1), between 201(LP1/LP1) and 4(RX2/TX2), between 202(LP2/LP2) and 7(RX5/
TX5), or between 202(LP2/LP2) and 8(RX6/TX6).

Step 5 Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful.
Step 6 Click Close.
----End

2.6.7 Service Mode (WDM Interface)


Description
The Service Mode parameter provides an option to query and set the working mode of a board
on the line side.

Impact on the System


None.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-175

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Values
For the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG
Value Range

Default Value

OTN, SDH

OTN

For the ND2, TN12NS2 and NQ2


Value Range

Default Value

ODU1, ODU2, Automatic

Automatic

For the LQM, TN12LQMD, TN12LQMS, TOM, and TQM


Value Range

Default Value

Client Mode , OTN Mode

Client Mode

For OptiX BWS 1600G/1600S/1600A


Value Range

Default Value

OTN, SDH

OTN

Configuration Guidelines
l

In the case of LH WDM equipment:


The mode of line-side services of boards on an NE at the local end should be the same as
that at the opposite end. The mode of line-side services should be set to SDH when an SDH
service board needs to be connected.

In the case of the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG boards: The mode of line-side services
of boards on an NE at the local end should be the same as that at the opposite end. When
a local-end board need be connected to an SDH service board of another product, the mode
of line-side services should be set to SDH.

In the case of the ND2, TN12NS2 and NQ2 boards:


When you groom the ODU1 services, you must set the ODU1 mode must be configured
When you groom When you groom the ODU1 services, you must set the ODU2 mode.
When you groom the ODU1 or ODU2 services, the Service Mode is assigned to boards
automatically and needs not be specified.

2-176

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

In the case of the LQM, LQMD, LQMS, TOM, and TQM boards: When the client side
accesses OTN services, set this parameter to OTN Mode. When the client side accesses
other services, set this parameter to Client Mode.

Relationship with Other Parameters


None.

2.6.8 Service Type (WDM Interface)


Description
The Service Type parameter provides an option to set the type of the service accessed at the
optical interface on the client side.
This parameter is applicable to the client side of the optical transponder board.

Impact on the System


Set this parameter according to the actual service. If this parameter is set inproperly, the service
may be unavailable.

Values
For OptiX BWS 1600G/1600S
Value Range

Default Value

SDH, SONET, OTU1, OTU2, 10GE(LAN),


NOFRAME, FC10G, OTU2(10.7G), OTU2e
(11.09G), OTU2e(11.1G), OTU2e(11.3G),
OTU2v(10.7G)

SDH

The following table lists the description of each value.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Value

Description

SDH

Indicates that the standard SDH service is accessed on the


client side.

SONET

Indicates that the standard SONE service is accessed on the


client side.

OTU1

Indicates that the OTU1 service is accessed on the client side.

OTU2

Indicates that the OTU2 service is accessed on the client side.

10GE(LAN)

Indicates that the 10 GE service is accessed on the client side.

NOFRAME

Indicates that the NOFRAME service is accessed on the client


side.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-177

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Value

Description

FC10G

Indicates that the FC10G service is accessed on the client side.

OTU2(10.7G)

Indicates that the OTU2(10.7G) service is accessed on the


client side.

OTU2e(11.09G)

Indicates that the OTU2e(11.09G) service is accessed on the


client side.

OTU2e(11.1G)

Indicates that the OTU2e(11.1G) service is accessed on the


client side.

OTU2e(11.3G)

Indicates that the OTU2e(11.3G) service is accessed on the


client side.

OTU2v(10.7G)

Indicates that the OTU2v(10.7G) service is accessed on the


client side.

For OptiX OSN 8800 T32/6800/3800:


Value Range

Default Value

10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, CLO, DVB-ASI,


DVBSDI, ESCON, ETR, FC-100, FC-200,
FC-400, FC-800, FC-1200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON Express, GE, HDTV, ISC
1G, ISC 2G, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192,
OC-768, OTU1, OTU2, OTU3, OTU3e,
STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-256,
OTU2v, Infiniband 2.5G, Infiniband 5G,
FC800, FICON8G, None

Vary with different boards

Configuration Guidelines
In practical applications, select a corresponding service type according to the accessed signal
type. You can query or set the value of the parameter. For details, refer to Hardware
Description.

2-178

In the case of the ETMX and ETMXS boards, the value can be SDH, SONET or OTU1.

In the case of the LBF and LBFS boards, the value can be SDH, SONET, OTU2, OTU2e
(11.09G), 10GE(LAN) or FC10G.

In the case of the IMX4 and IMX4S boards, the value can be SDH, SONET or NOFRAME.

In the case of the TMR and TMRS boards, when Auto-Adapter Enabled parameter is set
to Disable, the value can be OTU2(10.7G), OTU2e(11.1G), OTU2e(11.3G) and OTU2v
(10.7G).

In the case of other OTUs, the value can be either SDH or SONET.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Relationship with Other Parameters


None.

2.6.9 GUI Parameter Description: WDM Cross-Connection


Configuration
In this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.

Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management.
Click WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab.

Cautions
l

If the configuration for a new service is incorrect, the system will not apply the configuration
to the NE, will remind the user with a prompt.

Deactivating a service will interrupt the service.

If you want to configure a dynamic cross-connection, you need to delete the default static
cross-connection first so as to release the port resource.

Buttons

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Button

Description

New

Opens the Create Cross-connect Service


dialog box where you can create unprotected
cross-connections. After the creation, you can
select Apply to send configurations to the
NE.

Create WXCP Service

Opens the Create WXCP Service dialog box


where you can create WXCP crossconnections. After the creation, you can
select Activate Immediately to send the
configurations to the NE.

Create SNCP Service

Opens the Create SNCP Service dialog box


where you can create SNCP crossconnections. After the creation, you can
select Activate Immediately to send the
configurations to the NE.

Create Default XC

Displays the Create Default XC dialog box


to create all default dynamic crossconnections within the boards in the board
resource list. If a cross-connection is
configured for a board, this board is not
displayed in the Available Boards pane.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-179

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Button

Description

Delete

Deletes the selected cross-connection. Make


sure the cross-connection is deactivated
before this operation.

Activate

Sends services to the NE.

Deactivate

Deactivates services on the NE.

Shortcut Menu Items


Item

Description

Select All

Selects all of the cross-connections in the cross-connection


list.

Expand

Displays cross-connections contained in a group.

Join

Displays cross-connections as a group.

Activate

Sends services to the NE.

Deactivate

Deactivates services on the NE.

Convert to WXCP Service

Converts a normal service to an WXCP service.


The button is available only when the service is expanded and
displayed as the unidirectional service.

Convert to Non-Protection
Service

Converts an WXCP working service to a non-protection


service.

Convert to SNCP Service

Converts a normal service to an SNCP service.


The button is available only when the service is expanded and
displayed as the unidirectional service.

2-180

SNCP Working Service


Convert to Non-Protection
Service

Converts an SNCP working service to a non-protection


service.

SNCP Protection Service


Convert to Non-Protection
Service

Converts an SNCP protection service to a non-protection


service.

Delete

Deletes the selected cross-connection. Make sure the crossconnection is deactivated before this operation.

Browse Relevant Trails

Browses the trails that are related to the selected crossconnection.

Converting an SNCP working service to a non-protection


service may interrupt the service.

Converting an SNCP protection service to a non-protection


service may interrupt the service.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Parameters
Table 2-38 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration
Field

Value

Description

Level

Values of parameters vary


with different boards and
products. For details, click
the links in the Description
column.

The Level parameter is used


to differentiate the service
types configured when
electrical cross-connections
are configured.
Click Level (WDM CrossConnection Configuration)
for more information.

Service Type

For example: FE, STM-1,


FICON

The Service Type parameter


is used to set the type of the
services for a port when
cross-connections of Any
services are configured, to
match the type of the actual
services.
Click Service Type (WDM
Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Direction

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Unidirectional,
Bidirectional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The Direction parameter


indicates the service
direction mode when the
WDM cross-connection is
configured. It can set to either
Unidirectional or
Bidirectional.
Click Direction (WDM
Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

2-181

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Field

Value

Description

Source Channel

l Equipment that supports


the master and slave shelf
management: shelf ID
(shelf name)-slot
number-board name-port
number(port name)channel number

The Source Channel


parameter is used to query the
transmit channel of a certain
electrical cross-connect
service (unidirectional
service flow).
Click Source Channel
(WDM Cross-Connection)
for more information.

l Equipment that does not


support the master and
slave shelf management:
slot number-board nameport number(port name)channel number
Null
Default: Null
l Equipment that supports
the master and slave shelf
management: shelf ID
(shelf name)-slot
number-board name-port
number(port name)channel number

Sink Channel

l Equipment that does not


support the master and
slave shelf management:
slot number-board nameport number(port name)channel number

The Sink Channel parameter


is used to query the receive
channel of a certain electrical
cross-connect service
(unidirectional service flow).
Click Sink Channel (WDM
Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Null
Default: Null
Activation Status

Active, Inactive

The Activation Status


parameter is used to display
whether the service crossconnection configuration is
activated.
Click Activation Status
(WDM Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Service Origin

For example: Create


Manually

Displays the origin of the


WDM service.

Lockout Status

Unknown, Locked,
Unlocked

Indicates the lockout status of


an electrical crossconnection.

Default: Unlocked

2-182

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Field

Value

Description

Trail Name

For example: NE350NE351-ODU2-001-40

Displays the trail name.

Remarks

The Remarks parameter


enables you to record the
additional information on the
WDM cross-connection
when you create a WDM
cross-connection.

Table 2-39 Create Cross-connect Service


Field

Value

Description

Level

Values of parameters vary


with different boards and
products. For details, click
the links in the Description
column.

The Level parameter is used


to differentiate the service
types configured when
electrical cross-connections
are configured.
Click Level (WDM CrossConnection Configuration)
for more information.

Service Type

Values of parameters vary


with different boards and
products. For details, click
the links in the Description
column.

The Service Type parameter


is used to set the type of the
services for a port when
cross-connections of Any
services are configured, to
match the type of the actual
services.
Click Service Type (WDM
Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Direction

Unidirectional,
Bidirectional.

The Direction parameter


indicates the service
direction mode when the
WDM cross-connection is
configured. It can set to either
Unidirectional or
Bidirectional.

Default: Unidirectional

Click Direction (WDM


Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-183

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

2-184

Field

Value

Description

Source Slot

Values of parameters vary


with different boards and
products. For details, click
the links in the Description
column.

The Source Slot parameter is


used to set the ID of the slot
where the transmit OTU
board is located, which is
configured with WDM crossconnections.
Click Source Slot (WDM
Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Source Optical Port

The Source Optical Port


parameter is used to
configure the transmit optical
interface for a certain
electrical cross-connect
service (unidirectional
service flow).
Click Source Optical Port
(WDM Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Source Optical Channel

The Source Optical


Channel parameter is used to
set the number of the transmit
channel in the port on the
OTU board with electrical
cross-connections.
Click Source Optical
Channel (WDM CrossConnection Configuration)
for more information.

Sink Slot

Values of parameters vary


with different boards and
products. For details, click
the links in the Description
column.

The Sink Slot parameter is


used to set the ID of the slot
where the receive OTU board
is located, which is
configured with WDM crossconnections.
Click Sink Slot (WDM
Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Field

Value

Description

Sink Optical Port

The Sink Optical Port


parameter is used to
configure the receive optical
interface for a certain
electrical cross-connect
service (unidirectional
service flow).
Click Sink Optical Port
(WDM Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Sink Optical Channel

The Sink Optical Channel


parameter is used to set the
number of the receive
channel in the port on the
OTU board with electrical
cross-connections.
Click Sink Optical Channel
(WDM Cross-Connection)
for more information.

Activate Immediately

Active, Inactive

Sets whether to immediately


activate the crossconnection.

Default: Active
Remarks

The Remarks parameter


enables you to record the
additional information on the
WDM cross-connection
when you create a WDM
cross-connection.

Table 2-40 Create SNCP Service


Field

Value

Description

Protection Type

SW SNCP, ODUK SNCP,


MSSNCP

Specifies the level of the new


SNCP service.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 1800 series support
SW SNCP protection type only.

Click Protection Type


(SNCP Protection) for more
information.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-185

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Field

Value

Description

SNCP Type

SNC/I, SNC/S, SNC/N

Displays the protection type


of the service.
NOTE
When you select Protection
Type is ODUK SNCP, you can
set this parameter.

Click SNCP Type (SNCP


Protection) for more
information.
Service Type

For example: GE

Displays the service type of


the SNCP.

OTN Level

For example: PM

Sets the OTN level.


NOTE
When you select SNCP Type is
SNC/N or , SNC/S, you can set
this parameter.

Revertive Mode

Revertive, Non-Revertive
Default: Non-Revertive

Chooses whether the service


is switched to the original
working path after the failure
is eliminated. If you want the
service to be switched back to
the original working path
then, select Revertive. If you
do not want the service to be
switched back then, select
Non-Revertive.
Click Revertive Mode
(SNCP Protection) for more
information.

WTR Time(mm:ss)

2-186

5:00 to 12:00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Sets the wait-to-restore time.


It is the time interval between
the time when the working
service is detected to be
normal after switching and
the time when the service is
switched back to the working
path. You can modify the
WTR Time (s) only when
the Revertive Mode is
Revertive.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Field

Value

Description

Working Channel Hold-Off


Time(100ms)

0 to 100

Sets the time interval


between the time when the
system detects signal degrade
and the time when the service
switching occurs, in order to
avoid repeated switching
when the service status is not
stable. The switching delay
time is in 100 milliseconds.
For example, if you enter 5,
the delay time is 500
milliseconds.

Default: 0

Click Working Channel


Hold-Off Time (SNCP
Protection) for more
information.
Protection Channel Hold-Off
Time(100ms)

0 to 100
Default: 0

Sets the time interval


between the time when the
system detects signal degrade
and the time when the service
switching occurs, in order to
avoid repeated switching
when the service status is not
stable. The switching delay
time is in 100 milliseconds.
For example, if you enter 5,
the delay time is 500
milliseconds.
Click Protection Channel
Hold-Off Time (SNCP
Protection) for more
information.

SD Enable Status

Enabled, Disabled

Sets the SD enabling status.

Default: Disabled

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-187

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Field

Value

Description

Direction

Unidirectional, Bidirectional

l When you set Direction


to Unidirectional, after
you create the SNCP,
only the selective
receiving function is
implemented. To ensure
the service availability,
you must create two
routes in the reverse
direction on the source.

Default: Unidirectional

l When you set Direction


to Bidirectional, the
U2000 automatically
creates two routes in the
reverse direction.
The Remarks parameter
enables you to record the
additional information on the
SNCP service when you
create an SNCP service.

Remarks

2-188

Source Slot

Values of parameters vary


with different boards and
products. For details, click
the links in the Description
column.

The Source Slot parameter is


used to set the ID of the slot
where the transmit OTU
board is located, which is
configured with WDM crossconnections.
Click Source Slot (WDM
Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Source Optical Port

The Source Optical Port


parameter is used to
configure the transmit optical
interface for a certain
electrical cross-connect
service (unidirectional
service flow).
Click Source Optical Port
(WDM Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Field

Value

Description

Source Optical Channel

The Source Optical


Channel parameter is used to
set the number of the transmit
channel in the port on the
OTU board with electrical
cross-connections.
Click Source Optical
Channel (WDM CrossConnection Configuration)
for more information.

Sink Slot

Values of parameters vary


with different boards and
products. For details, click
the links in the Description
column.

The Sink Slot parameter is


used to set the ID of the slot
where the receive OTU board
is located, which is
configured with WDM crossconnections.
Click Sink Slot (WDM
Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Sink Optical Port

The Sink Optical Port


parameter is used to
configure the receive optical
interface for a certain
electrical cross-connect
service (unidirectional
service flow).
Click Sink Optical Port
(WDM Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Sink Optical Channel

The Sink Optical Channel


parameter is used to set the
number of the receive
channel in the port on the
OTU board with electrical
cross-connections.
Click Sink Optical Channel
(WDM Cross-Connection)
for more information.

Activate Immediately

Active, Inactive

Sets whether to immediately


activate the crossconnection.

Default: Active

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-189

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Field

Value

Description

South Port Slot

l Equipment that supports


the master and slave shelf
management: shelf ID
(shelf name)-slot
number-board name

Displays the slot number of


the board where the
southbound port is located.

l Equipment that does not


support the master and
slave shelf management:
slot number-board name
South Port

For example: 3(RX/TX)

Displays the number of the


southbound port.

Table 2-41 Create WXCP Service


Field

Value

Description

Level

For example: GE

Displays the rate level of the


service.

Protection Type

1+1

Specifies the level of the new


WXCP service.

Direction

Unidirectional, Bidirectional

l When you set Direction


to Unidirectional, after
you create the WXCP,
only the selective
receiving function is
implemented. To ensure
the service availability,
you must create two
routes in the reverse
direction on the source.

Default: Unidirectional

l When you set Direction


to Bidirectional, the
U2000 automatically
creates two routes in the
reverse direction.
Source Slot

2-190

Values of parameters vary


with different boards and
products. For details, click
the links in the Description
column.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The Source Slot parameter is


used to set the ID of the slot
where the transmit OTU
board is located, which is
configured with WDM crossconnections.
Click Source Slot (WDM
Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Field

Value

Description

Source Optical Port

The Source Optical Port


parameter is used to
configure the transmit optical
interface for a certain
electrical cross-connect
service (unidirectional
service flow).
Click Source Optical Port
(WDM Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Source Optical Channel

The Source Optical


Channel parameter is used to
set the number of the transmit
channel in the port on the
OTU board with electrical
cross-connections.
Click Source Optical
Channel (WDM CrossConnection Configuration)
for more information.

Sink Slot

Values of parameters vary


with different boards and
products. For details, click
the links in the Description
column.

The Sink Slot parameter is


used to set the ID of the slot
where the receive OTU board
is located, which is
configured with WDM crossconnections.
Click Sink Slot (WDM
Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Sink Optical Port

The Sink Optical Port


parameter is used to
configure the receive optical
interface for a certain
electrical cross-connect
service (unidirectional
service flow).
Click Sink Optical Port
(WDM Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-191

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System


Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2 End-to-End WDM Management

Field

Value

Description

Sink Optical Channel

The Sink Optical Channel


parameter is used to set the
number of the receive
channel in the port on the
OTU board with electrical
cross-connections.
Click Sink Optical Channel
(WDM Cross-Connection)
for more information.

Activate Immediately

Active, Inactive

Sets whether to immediately


activate the crossconnection.

Default: Active

2-192

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi